Download: MVC-FD97 SERVICE MANUAL US Model Canadian Model Level 2 AEP Model UK Model E Model Ver 1.1 2001. 06 Hong Kong Model Australian Model Korea Model Japanese Model

MVC-FD97 SERVICE MANUAL US Model Canadian Model Level 2 AEP Model UK Model E Model Ver 1.1 2001. 06 Hong Kong Model Australian Model Korea Model Japanese Model This service manual contains information for Japanese model as well. When the machine needs to be repaired, please refer to page 6 to discriminate the type of LCD. On the FC-85 board FC-85 board This service manual procides the information that is premised the Schematic diagram ... Page 4-15 to 4-38 circuit board replacement service and not intended repair inside the Printed wiring board ... Page 4-11 to 4-14 FC-85 board. Electrical par...
Author: Pai Shared: 7/30/19
Downloads: 1159 Views: 2877

Content

MVC-FD97 SERVICE MANUAL US Model Canadian Model Level 2 AEP Model UK Model E Model Ver 1.1 2001. 06 Hong Kong Model Australian Model Korea Model Japanese Model

This service manual contains information for Japanese model as well. When the machine needs to be repaired, please refer to page 6 to discriminate the type of LCD.

On the FC-85 board FC-85 board

This service manual procides the information that is premised the Schematic diagram ... Page 4-15 to 4-38 circuit board replacement service and not intended repair inside the Printed wiring board ... Page 4-11 to 4-14 FC-85 board. Electrical parts list ... Page 6-11 to 6-18 Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board and electrical parts list of the FC-85 board is not shown. The above-described information is shown in service manual The following pages are not shown. Level 3.

SPECIFICATIONS

System Recording medium USB jack Image device Floppy disk: mini-B 6.64 mm (1/2.7 type) color 3.5 inch 2HD MS-DOS LCD screen CCD format (1.44 MB) LCD panel “Memory Stick” Lens TFT (Thin Film Transistor 10× zoom lens Flash active matrix) drive f = 6.0 – 60.0 mm (1/4 – Recommended recording Total number of dots 2 3/8 inches) distance: 123 200 (560×220) dots (39 – 390 mm 0.6 m to 2.5 m (23 5/8 inches (1 9/16 – 15 3/8 inches) to 8 1/3 feet) Finder when converted into a Input and Output LCD panel 35 mm still camera) connector TFT (Thin Film Transistor F = 2.8 active matrix) drive A/V OUT (MONO) Exposure control (Monaural) Total number of dots Automatic exposure Minijack Video: 180 000 (800×225) dots White balance 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced, Automatic, Indoor, Outdoor, sync negative – Continued on next page – One-push Audio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ Data system load) Movie: MPEG Output impedance: 2.2 kΩ Still: JPEG, GIF (in TEXT ACC jack mode, Clip Motion), TIFF Minijack Audio with still image: MPEG (Monaural)

DIGITAL STILL CAMERA

, General AC-L10A/L10B/L10C Operating temperature Application AC power adaptor 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) Sony battery pack NP-F330 Power requirements Dimensions (Approx.) (supplied)/F550 100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz 38.4×20.6×70.8 mm Power requirements Rated output voltage (1 9/16×13/16×2 7/8 inches) 8.4 V DC 8.4 V, 1.5 A in operating (w/h/d) Power consumption mode Mass (Approx.) (During shooting) Operating temperature 70 g (2 oz) 4.2 W (When using the LCD 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) screen) Storage temperature Accessories 3.8 W (When using the –20°C to +60°C (–4°F to AC-L10A/L10B/L10C finder) +140°F) AC power adaptor (1) Operating temperature Dimensions (Approx.) Power cord (mains lead) (1) 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) 125×39×62 mm (5×1 9/16× USB cable (1) Storage temperature 2 1/2 inches) (w/h/d) NP-F330 battery pack (1) –20°C to +60°C (–4°F to A/V connecting cable (1)Mass (Approx.) +140°F) 280 g (10 oz) Shoulder strap (1) Lens cap (1) Dimensions (Approx.) 127×124×184 mm NP-F330 battery pack Lens cap strap (1) (5×5×7 1/4 inches) (w/h/d) Battery type CD-ROM (SPVD-004 USB Mass (Approx.) Lithium ion Driver) (1) Operating instructions (1) 990 g (2 lb 3 oz) (including Maximum output NP-F330 battery pack, voltage DC 8.4 V Design and specificationsfloppy disk/“Memory Stick” are subject to change and lens cap, etc.) Mean output voltage DC 7.2 V without notice.Built-in microphone Electret condenser Capacity microphone 5.0 Wh (700 mAh) Built-in speaker Dynamic speaker • Floppy disk that can be used by the MVC-FD97 • Size : 3.5-inch • Type : 2 HD • Capacity : 1.44 MB • Format : MS-DOS format (512 bytes × 18 sector) (FD can be formatted by the MVC-FD97) SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED À LA SÉCURITÉ! LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFIÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE SUR LES DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH DES PIÈCES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COM- SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUB- POSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈCES SONY DONT LES LISHED BY SONY. NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU DANS LES SUPPLÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.

SAFETY CHECK-OUT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer. 1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-sol- 4. Look for parts which, though functioning, show obvious signs dered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recom- splashes and bridges. mend their replacement. 2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are 5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified. “pinched” or contact high-wattage resistors. 6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing 3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transis- • Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270 ˚C tors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point them during repairing. out to the customer and recommend their replacement. • Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the circuit board (within 3 times). • Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when sol- dering or unsoldering. – 2 –,

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Title Page Section Title Page SERVICE NOTE... 5 PK-55 Printed Wiring Board ... 4-43 PK-55 (MODE SWITCH, A/V OUT) Self-diagnosis Display ... 7 Schematic Diagram ... 4-47 PK-55 (LCD DRIVE) Schematic Diagram ... 4-49 PK-55 (LCD TIMING GENERATOR) 1. GENERAL Schematic Diagram ... 4-51 PK-55 (BACK LIGHT DRIVE) Schematic Diagram ... 4-53 VF-143 Printed Wiring Board ... 4-55 Introduction ... 1-1 VF-143 (LCD DRIVE) Schematic Diagram ... 4-57 Identifying the Parts ... 1-2 VF-143 (TIMING GENERATOR, EVF LCD, Preparing the Power Supply ... 1-2 BACK LIGHT) Schematic Diagram ... 4-59 Setting the Date and Time ... 1-3 MA-404 Printed Wiring Board and Inserting a Floppy Disk ... 1-4 Schematic Diagram ... 4-61 Inserting a “Memory Stick” ... 1-4 AE-25 Printed Wiring Board and Recording Still Images ... 1-4 Schematic Diagram ... 4-63 Recording Moving Images ... 1-6 CF-83 Printed Wiring Board and Playing Back Still Images ... 1-6 Schematic Diagram ... 4-65 Playing Back Moving Images ... 1-7 FU-153 Printed Wiring Board and Viewing Images Using a Computer ... 1-7 Schematic Diagram ... 4-67 Image File Storage Destinations and Image File Names ... 1-9 4-3. Waveforms ... 4-69 Before Performing Advanced Operations ... 1-10 4-4. Parts Location ... 4-73 Various Recording ... 1-12 Various Playback ... 1-15 Editing ... 1-16 As an External Drive ... 1-18 5. ADJUSTMENTS Additional Information ... 1-18 Troubleshooting ... 1-20 Before Starting Adjustment ... 5-1 Warning and Notice Messages ... 1-21 1-1. Adjusting Items when Replacing Self-diagnosis Display ... 1-22 Main Parts and Boards... 5-2 LCD Screen Indicators ... 1-22 5-1. Camera Section Adjustments ... 5-3 1-1. Preparations Before Adjustment ... 5-3 1-1-1. List of Service Tools ... 5-3 2. DISASSEMBLY 1-1-2. Preparations ... 5-41-1-3. Discharging of the Flashlight Power Supply ... 5-4 1-1-4. Precautions ... 5-6 2-1. Top Cabinet Block Assembly ... 2-2 1. Setting the Switch ... 5-6 2-2. EVF Block Assembly ... 2-2 2. Order of Adjustments ... 5-6 2-3. VF Lens Assembly ... 2-2 3. Subjects ... 5-6 2-4. VF-143 Board ... 2-2 4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box ... 5-7 2-5. Cabinet (Rear) Block Assembly ... 2-3 1-2. Initialization of B, D, E, F, 7 Page Data ... 5-8 2-6. PK-55 Board ... 2-3 1-2-1. Initialization of D Page Data ... 5-8 2-7. LCD Module ... 2-4 1. Initializing D Page Data... 5-8 2-8. FDD Block Assembly ... 2-5 2. Modification of D Page Data ... 5-8 2-9. FU-153 Board ... 2-5 3. D Page Table ... 5-8 2-10. Lens Complete Block Assembly ... 2-5 1-2-2. Initialization of B, E, F, 7 Page Data ... 5-9 2-11. Cabinet VP Block Assembly ... 2-5 1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 Page Data ... 5-9 2-12. VP-55 Board ... 2-6 2. Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data ... 5-9 2-13. Lens Block Assembly ... 2-6 3. B Page Table ... 5-9 2-14. FC-85 Board ... 2-7 4. E Page Table ... 5-9 2-15. CF-83 Board ... 2-7 5. F Page Table ... 5-10 2-16. Circuit Boards Location ... 2-8 6. 7 Page Table ... 5-12 2-17. Flexible Boards Location ... 2-9 1-3. Video System Adjustments ... 5-13 1. Video Sync Level Adjustment ... 5-13 2. Video Burst Level Adjustment ... 5-13 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS 1-4. Camera System Adjustment ... 5-14 1. Hall Adjustment ... 5-15 3-1. Overall Block Diagram ... 3-1 2. Flange Back Adjustment (Using the Minipattern Box) .. 5-16 3-12. Power Block Diagram 1 ... 3-23 3. Flange Back Adjustment (Using the Flange Back 3-13. Power Block Diagram 2 ... 3-25 Adjustment Chart and a Subject More than 3-14. Power Block Diagram 3 ... 3-27 500 m Away) ... 5-17 4. Flange Back Check ... 5-18 5. F No. Standard Data Input ... 5-19 4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND 6. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment ... 5-19 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 7. Picture Frame Setting ... 5-20 8. Light Level Adjustment and ND Shutter Check ... 5-21 4-1. Frame Schematic Diagrams ... 4-3 9. Mixed Color Cancel Adjustment ... 5-22 Frame Schematic Diagram (1/2) ... 4-3 10. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input ... 5-22 Frame Schematic Diagram (2/2) ... 4-5 11. Auto White Balance ND Filter Compensation ... 5-23 4-2. Printed Wiring Boards and Schematic Diagrams ... 4-7 12. Auto White Balance Adjustment ... 5-24 CD-311 Printed Wiring Board ... 4-7 13. Color Reproduction Adjustment ... 5-25 CD-311 (CCD IMAGER) Schematic Diagram ... 4-8 14. Color Reproduction Check ... 5-26 CD-311 (STEADY SHOT SENSOR) 15. Auto White Balance Check ... 5-28 Schematic Diagram ... 4-9 16. Strobe White Balance Adjustment ... 5-30 VP-55 Printed Wiring Board ... 4-39 17. Strobe Light Level and White Balance Check ... 5-31 VP-55 Schematic Diagram ... 4-41 18. CCD Black Defect Compensation ... 5-32 – 3 –, Section Title Page 19. CCD White Defect Compensation ... 5-33 20. Steady Shot Adjustment ... 5-34 1-5. Color Electronic Viewfinder System Adjustments ... 5-37 1. EVF Initial Data Input ... 5-37 2. VCO Adjustment (VF-141 Board) ... 5-38 3. Bright Adjustment (VF-141 Board) ... 5-39 4. Contrast Adjustment (VF-141 Board) ... 5-40 5. Backlight Consumption Current Adjustment (VF-141 Board) ... 5-41 6. White Balance Adjustment (VF-141 Board) ... 5-41 1-6. LCD System Adjustments ... 5-42 1. LCD Initial Data Input ... 5-43 2. VCO Adjustment (FC-85 Board) ... 5-44 3. D Range Adjustment (FC-85 Board) ... 5-44 4. Bright Adjustment (FC-85 Board) ... 5-45 5. Contrast Adjustment (FC-85 Board) ... 5-45 6. Color Adjustment (FC-85 Board) ... 5-46 7. V-COM Level Adjustment (FC-85 Board) ... 5-46 8. V-COM Adjustment (FC-85 Board) ... 5-47 9. White Balance Adjustment (FC-85 Board) ... 5-47 1-7. System Control System Adjustments ... 5-48 1. Battery Down Adjustment ... 5-48 2. ZOOM Center Adjustment ... 5-49 3. Eye Sensor Adjustment ... 5-49 4. Eye Sensor Check ... 5-50 5. Alignment Check (FDD Unit) ... 5-50 5-2. Service Mode ... 5-51 2-1. Adjusting Remote Commander ... 5-51 1. Used the Adjusting Remote Commander ... 5-51 2. Precaution upon Using the Adjusting Remote Commander ... 5-51 2-2. Data Process ... 5-52 2-3. Service Mode ... 5-53 1. Setting the Test Mode ... 5-53 2. Bit Value Discrimination ... 5-53 3. Switch Check (1) ... 5-53 4. Switch Check (2) ... 5-53 5. Switch Check (3) ... 5-54 6. LED Check ... 5-54 7. Self Diagnosis Code ... 5-54 6. REPAIR PARTS LIST 6-1. Exploded Views ... 6-1 6-1-1. Main Section ... 6-1 6-1-2. Top Cabinet Block Assembly ... 6-2 6-1-3. EVF Block Assembly ... 6-3 6-1-4. Lens Complete Assembly ... 6-4 6-1-5. Lens Block Assembly ... 6-5 6-1-6. Cabinet (Front) Block Assembly ... 6-6 6-1-7. FDD Block Assembly ... 6-7 6-1-8. Cabinet (Rear) Block Assembly ... 6-8 6-2. Electrical Parts List ... 6-9 * The color reproduction frame is shown on page 169. – 4 –,

SERVICE NOTE

• NOTE FOR REPAIR When remove a connector, don’t pull at wire of connector. It is possible that a wire is snapped. Make sure that the flat cable and flexible board are not cracked of bent at the terminal. Do not insert the cable insufficiently nor crookedly. When installing a connector, don’t press down at wire of connector. It is possible that a wire is snapped. Cut and remove the part of gilt which comes off at the point. (Be careful or some pieces of gilt may be left inside) [Discharging of the FLASH unit’s charging capacitor] Discharging the Capacitor Short-circuit between the positive and the negative terminals of The charging capacitor of the FLASH unit is charged up to the charged capacitor with the short jig about 10 seconds. maximum 300 V potential. There is a danger of electric shock by this high voltage when the battery is handled by hand. The electric shock is caused by the R: 1 kΩ/1 W (Part code: charged voltage which is kept without discharging when the main 1-215-869-11) power of the MVC-FD97 is simply turned off. Therefore, the re- maining voltage must be discharged as described below. Preparing the Short Jig To preparing the short jig. a small clip is attached to each end of a resistor of 1 kΩ /1 W (1-215-869-11). Wrap insulating tape fully around the leads of the resistor to pre- Capacitor vent electrical shock. 1 kΩ/1 W Wrap insulating tape. – 5 –, [LCD type check] By measuring the resistor value between Pin qd of CN803 and Pin 4 of CN803 on FC-85 board, the type of LCD can be discrimi- nated. Note: About PK-55 board and LCD module, discriminate LCD type on the machine, and replace the same type. FC-85 board CN803 Resistor value LCD type PD board 4.7 kΩ TYPE S PK-55 (TYPE S) 47 kΩ TYPE C PK-55 (TYPE C) Volt ohm meter 22 qd pin14pin CPC cover FC-85 board 22 CN803 CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A) – 6 –, [Description on Self-diagnosis Display] Note : The “Self-diagnosis” data is backed up by the coin lithiumbattery. The data will be lost and initialized when the coin lithium battery is removed. Display Code Countermeasure Cause Caution Display During Error Change the disk and turn off the main C:32:01 Defective floppy disk. DRIVE ERROR power then back on. • The type of floppy disk that cannot be Replace the floppy disk or “Memory used by this machine, is inserted. Stick”. (Such as 2DD) DISK ERROR C:13:01 Format the floppy disk or “Memory Stick” • Data is damaged. MEMORY STICK ERROR with the MVC-FD97. • Unformatted disk or “Memory Stick” is inserted. Flash LED Checking of flash unit or replacement of Abnormality when flash is being E:91:01 Flash display flash unit charged. *1 Flashing at 3.2 Hz E:61:00 Checking of lens drive circuit When failed in the focus initialization. — E61:10 Note : The error code is cleared if the battery is removed, except defective flash, unit. *1: When the flash charging failed, Page: D, Address: 67, Data: 04 are written. After repair, be sure to write Page: D, Address: 67, Data: 00. [Power supplying Method] Use the AC power adaptor (AC-L10A) when supplying the power to this set. – 7 –,

MVC-FD97 SECTION 1 This section is extracted GENERAL from instruction manual.

. Regulatory Information The supplied interface cable must be used If the plug supplied with this equipment has

WARNING with the equipment in order to comply with a detachable fuse cover, be sure to attach the

Declaration of Conformity the limits for a digital device pursuant to fuse cover after you change the fuse. Never To prevent fire or shock hazard, do Trade Name: SONY Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules. use the plug without the fuse cover. If you not expose the unit to rain or Model No.: MVC-FD97 should lose the fuse cover, please contact moisture. Responsible Party:Sony Electronics Inc. your nearest Sony service station. Address: 1 Sony Drive, Park For the Customers in the

For the Customers in the Ridge, NJ, 07656 U.S.A. and Canada For the Customers in U.S.A. USA

Telephone No.: 201-930-6972 DISPOSAL OF LITHIUM ION

Germany BATTERY. Directive:EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.92/

This device complies with Part 15 of the LITHIUM ION BATTERY. 31/EEC FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

DISPOSE OF PROPERLY. This equipment complies with the EMCfollowing two conditions: (1) This device regulations when used under the following

may not cause harmful interference, and You can return your unwanted lithium ion circumstances: (2) this device must accept any batteries to your nearest Sony Service • Residential area interference received, including Center or Factory Service Center. • Business district interference that may cause undesired • Light-industry district operation. Note: (This equipment complies with the EMC In some areas the disposal of lithium ion standard regulations EN55022 Class B.) CAUTION batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited.

You are cautioned that any changes or Attention

This symbol is intended to modifications not expressly approved For the Sony Service Center nearest you call alert the user to the presence in this manual could void your The electromagnetic fields at the specific1-800-222-SONY (United States only) of uninsulated “dangerous authority to operate this equipment. frequencies may influence the picture andFor the Sony Factory Service Center nearest sound of this camera. voltage” within the you call 416-499-SONY (Canada only) product’s enclosure that Note: may be of sufficient This equipment has been tested and found to Caution: magnitude to constitute a comply with the limits for a Class B digital Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium risk of electric shock to device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC ion battery. persons. Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful For the Customers in Canada This symbol is intended to interference in a residential installation. This alert the user to the presence equipment generates, uses, and can radiate CAUTION of important operating and radio frequency energy and, if not installed TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT maintenance (servicing) and used in accordance with the USE THIS POLARIZED AC PLUG WITH instructions in the literature instructions, may cause harmful interference AN EXTENSION CORD, RECEPTACLE OR accompanying the to radio communications. However, there is OTHER OUTLET UNLESS THE BLADES appliance. no guarantee that interference will not occur CAN BE FULLY INSERTED TO PREVENT in a particular installation. If this equipment BLADE EXPOSURE. If you have any questions about this product, does cause harmful interference to radio or you may call: television reception, which can be Sony Customer Information Center NOTICE FOR THEdetermined by turning the equipment off and 1-800-222-SONY (7669) CUSTOMERS IN THE UNITEDon, the user is encouraged to try to correct The number below is for the FCC related KINGDOMthe interference by one or more of the matters only. following measures: A moulded plug complying with BS 1363 is — Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. fitted to this equipment for your safety and — Increase the separation between the convenience. equipment and receiver. — Connect the equipment into an outlet on Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to a circuit different from that to which the be replaced, a 5 AMP fuse approved by receiver is connected. ASTA or BSI to BS 1362, (i.e. marked with — Consult the dealer or an experienced or mark) must be used. radio/TV technician for help. 2 3

Be sure to read the following Do not shake or strike the camera

before using your camera In addition to malfunctions and inability torecord images, this may render the floppy Introduction Operating instructions disks or “Memory Stick”s unusable or Before operating the unit, please read this image data breakdown, damage or loss may Deletes undesired images right away, checking the image manual thoroughly, and retain it for future occur. after shooting reference. LCD screen, finder (only models The digital still camera is able to play back the image and delete it right away. As you read through this manual, buttons with a finder) and lens Recording still images: and settings on the camera are shown in • The LCD screen and the finder are page 18 capital letters. manufactured using extremely high- e.g. Press DISPLAY. Playing back still images:precision technology so over 99.99% of page 26 Trial recording the pixels are operational for effective use. Deleting images Before you record one-time events, you may However, there may be some tiny black (DELETE): page 66 want to make a trial recording to make sure points and/or bright points (white, red, that the camera is working correctly. blue or green in color) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and the finder. No compensation for contents of These points are normal in the the recording manufacturing process and do not affect Contents of the recording cannot be the recording in any way. Captures images with your computer compensated for if recording or playback is • Be careful when placing the camera near a not made due to a malfunction of your window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD

You can easily copy images onto your computer using a floppy disk or a “Memory

screen, the finder or the lens to direct Stick,” and view and modify images on your computer using application software.camera or recording medium, etc. sunlight for long periods may cause Viewing images using a Notes on image data compatibility malfunctions. computer: page 29 of the “Memory Stick” • This camera conforms with the Design rule Do not get the camera wet for Camera File system universal standard When taking pictures outdoors in the rain or established by the JEITA (Japan Electrics under similar conditions, be careful not to and Information Technology Industries get the camera wet. If moisture Association). You cannot play back on condensation occurs, refer to page 74 and your camera still images recorded on other follow the instructions on how to remove it equipment (DCR-TRV890E/TRV900/ before using the camera. TRV900E, DSC-D700, DSC-D770) that Records a moving picture with audioBack up recommendation does not conform with this universal The digital still camera can record a moving picture with audio for maximum 60 seconds. standard. (These models are not sold in To avoid the potential risk of data loss, always copy (back up) data to a disk. Recording movingsome areas.) images: page 25 • Playback of images recorded with your When the camera is used for long camera on other equipment and playback periods of images recorded or edited with other Note that the camera body may become hot. equipment on your camera are not guaranteed. Precaution on copyright Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted. Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the provision of the Selects the recording mode from various types of recordings copyright laws. according to your situation

Creating Clip Motion Files: page 49 Recording still images for e-mail (E-MAIL): page 51 Adding audio files to still images (VOICE): page 51 Recording text documents (TEXT): page 52 Recording still images as uncompressed files (TIFF): page 53

4 6 1-1, Getting started

Identifying the parts qa

See the pages in parentheses for details of operation. Attaching the 1 qa shoulder strap 2 qs 3 qd 1 qs 4 qf 2 qd 5 qg 6 qh 3 qf 7 qj 4 qg 8 qk 5 qh ql qj 9 w; 6 qk 0 wa 7 ql 8 w; 9 wa A OPEN (FLASH) button (23) K Flash (23) 0 ws B Built-in microphone L Accessory shoe A LCD screen K Hooks for strap Do not touch while recording. M SPOT METER button (57) B Finder (19) L ACC (Accessory) jack C Self-timer lamp (23) N Finder adjustment dial (19) C LCD ON/OFF switch (20) M PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector (40) D Shutter button (18, 25) O WHITE BALANCE button (59) D VOL +/– buttons (28) N Access lamp (18, 19) E Zoom lever (21) P PROGRAM AE button (56) E Lens cap (supplied) O DISK EJECT lever (16) F Photocell window for flash Q STEADY SHOT ON/OFF switch F (Flash) button/ (Flash) P Speaker Do not block while recording. (22) lamp (23) Q Floppy disk slot (16) G Focus ring (55) R A/V OUT (MONO) jack (64) G POWER ON/OFF (CHG) R Battery cover/PUSH button H Lens Audio output is monaural. (Charge) lamp (11, 14) (bottom surface) (9) I DC IN cover/DC IN jack (10, 13) S FOCUS AUTO/MANUAL switch H POWER switch (14) S “Memory Stick” cover/ (54, 55) I Tripod receptacle (bottom surface) “Memory Stick” slot (17) J (One-push white balance) T (Macro) button (54) Use a tripod with a screw length of T USB cover/USB jack (31)button (59) less than 6.5 mm (7/32 inch). You U MS /FD (“Memory Stick”/floppy U PROGRAM AE +/– buttons (56) cannot firmly secure the camera to disk) selector tripods having longer screws, and may damage the camera. V Control button (40) J DISPLAY button (22) 7 8

Preparing the power supply Charging the battery pack

When the camera is turned on, you cannot charge the battery pack. Be sure to turn off

Installing the battery pack the power of the camera.

Your camera operates only with the NP-F330 (supplied)/F550 (not supplied) “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack* (L series). See page 77 for more information about “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. to DC IN jack AC-L10A/L10B/L10C123AC power adaptor Power cord1122(mains lead) 2 Battery pack 1 Open the battery cover. 3 Slide the battery cover in the direction of the arrow while pressing the PUSH to a wall outlet (mains) button. 2 Install the battery pack. Insert the battery pack with the v mark facing toward the battery compartment 1 Insert the battery pack into your camera. as illustrated. 2 Open the DC IN cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC 3 Close the battery cover. IN jack of your camera with the v mark facing up. 3 Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the AC power adaptor and To remove the battery pack then to a wall outlet (mains). The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp (orange) below the LCD screen lights up Open the battery cover. Slide the battery eject lever rightward, and remove when charging begins. When the POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp goes off, full the battery pack. Be careful not to drop the battery pack when removing it. charge is completed. After charging the battery pack Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camera. Battery remaining indicator The LCD screen or finder on the camera shows the remaining time for which you can Battery eject lever still record or play back images. This indication may not be entirely accurate depending on the conditions of use and * What is “InfoLITHIUM”? the operating environment. “InfoLITHIUM” is a lithium ion battery pack which can exchange information such as battery Charging at a room temperature of 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F) is recommended. consumption with compatible video equipment. “InfoLITHIUM” L series battery packs have the mark. “InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. 9 10 1-2 Getting started Getting started, NP-F330 (supplied)/F550 (not supplied) battery pack STILL mode recording/playback when using “Memory Stick”s When you record images in an extremely cold location or using the LCD screen, the NP-F330 (supplied) NP-F550 operating time becomes short. When using the camera in an extremely cold location, place the battery pack in your pocket or other place to keep it warm, then insert the Battery life Number of Battery life Number of battery pack into the camera just before recording. When using a pocket heater, take (min.) images (min.) images care not to let the heater directly contact the battery. Continuous Approx. 80 Approx. 1600 Approx. 170 Approx. 3400 recording* Auto power-off function Continuous Approx. 100 Approx. 3000 Approx. 230 Approx. 6900 If you do not operate the camera for about three minutes during recording, the camera playback** turns off automatically to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To use the camera again, slide the POWER switch to the right to turn on the camera again. Approximate battery life and number of images that can be recorded/played back at a temperature of 25°C (77°F) with a fully charged battery pack, 640×480 image size Note on the POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp during charging and in NORMAL recording mode. The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp may flash: ∗ Recording at about 5-second intervals when using a floppy disk, or at about 3-second intervals • When a malfunction occurs in the battery pack (page 84). when using a “Memory Stick” The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp does not light up: ∗∗ Playing back single images continuously at about 2-second intervals • When the battery pack is not installed properly. MOVIE mode recording when using floppy disks Charging time NP-F330 (supplied) NP-F550 Battery life (min.) Battery life (min.) Battery pack Full charge (min.) Continuous recording Approx. 85 Approx. 180 NP-F330 (supplied) Approx. 150 NP-F550 Approx. 210 MOVIE mode recording when using “Memory Stick”s Approximate time to charge a completely discharged battery pack at a temperature of NP-F330 (supplied) NP-F550 25°C (77°F). Battery life (min.) Battery life (min.) Continuous recording Approx. 90 Approx. 190 Battery life and number of images that can be recorded/played back Approximate time that can be recorded at a temperature of 25°C (77°F) and 160×112 image size with a fully charged battery pack. STILL mode recording/playback when using floppy disks NP-F330 (supplied) NP-F550 Notes • The battery life and number of images will be decreased when using at low temperature, using Battery life Number of Battery life Number of the flash, turning the power on/off frequently, or using the zoom. (min.) images (min.) images • The capacity of the floppy disk or “Memory Stick” is limited. The above figures are as a guide when you continuously record/play back by replacing the floppy disk or “Memory Stick.” Continuous Approx. 65 Approx. 650 Approx. 150 Approx. 1600 • If sufficient battery remaining time is indicated but the power runs out soon, fully charge the recording* battery so that the correct battery remaining time appears. Continuous Approx. 80 Approx. 2200 Approx. 170 Approx. 4800 • Do not short the DC plug of the AC power adaptor with a metallic object, as this may cause a playback** malfunction. 11 12

Using the AC power adaptor Setting the date and time

When you first use your camera, set the date and time. If these are not set, the CLOCK SET screen appears whenever you turn on your camera. to DC IN jack AC-L10A/L10B/L10C AC power adaptor Control button Power cord (mains lead) 2 POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp to a wall outlet (mains) 1 Slide the POWER switch to the right to turn on the power. The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) (green) lamp lights up. 1 Open the DC IN cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC IN jack of your camera with the v mark facing up. 2 Press v on the control button. 2 Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the AC power adaptor and The menu bar appears on the LCD screen or on the then to a wall outlet (mains). finder. Using a car battery EFFECT FILE CAMERA SETUP Use Sony DC adaptor/charger. SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF Using your camera abroad 3 Select [SETUP] with Bon the control button, For details, see page 76. then press the center z. VIDEO OUT /LANGUAGE When using the AC power adaptor CLOCK SET

BEEP

LCD BRIGHT Be sure to use it near a wall outlet. If a malfunction occurs, disconnect the plug from EFFECT FILE CAMERA SETUP the wall outlet. SELECT CLOSE 4 Select [CLOCK SET] with v/V on the control button, then press the center z. VIDEO OUT CLOCK SET Y/M/D /LANGUAGE200111M/D/Y CLOCK SET 12:00:00AM D/M/Y

BEEP ENTER

LCD BRIGHT 2001 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 AM

CANCEL

EFFECT FILE CAMERA SETUP SELECT OK SELECT OK 13 14 1-3 Getting started Getting started, 5 Select the desired date display format with Inserting a floppy disk v/V on the control button, then press the center z. CLOCK SET Y/M/D Select from [Y/M/D] (year/month/day), [M/D/Y] M/D/Y D/M/Y (month/day/year), or [D/M/Y] (day/month/year). 2001 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 AM ENTER

CANCEL

SELECT/ADJUST OK 6 Select the year, month, day, hour or minute item you want to set with b/B on the control button. CLOCK SET Y/M/D The item to be set is indicated with v/V. M/D/Y D/M/Y 2 2001 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 AM ENTER

CANCEL

SELECT/ADJUST OK EJECT lock DISK EJECT lever17Set the numeric value with v/V on the control button, then press the center z to enter it. CLOCK SET Y/M/D 1 Check that the write protect tab is set to the recordable position for After entering the number, v/V moves to the next M/D/Y D/M/Y recording. item. If you selected [D/M/Y] in step 5, set the 2001 / 7 / 1 12 : 00 AM ENTER time on a 24-hour cycle. Recordable/erasableCANCEL SELECT/ADJUST OK Unrecordable/unerasable 8 Select [ENTER] with B on the control button, then press the center z at the desired moment to begin clock movement. CLOCK SET Y/M/D The date and time are entered. M/D/Y D/M/Y 2001 / 7 / 4 10 : 30 PM ENTER 2 Insert the floppy disk until it clicks.

CANCEL

SELECT OK Usable floppy disks To cancel the date and time setting • Size: 3.5 inch Select [CANCEL] with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the center z. • Type: 2HD (1.44 MB) • Format: MS-DOS format (512 bytes × 18 sectors) Notes • Do not insert the media other than the floppy disks described above. • You cannot use the optional MSAC-FD2M/FD2MA Floppy Disk Adaptor for Memory Stick. • Never remove the floppy disk, turn off the power, or change the position of the MS/FD selector while the access lamp is lit up. Removing the floppy disk While sliding the EJECT lock to the left, slide down the DISK EJECT lever. 15 16

Basic operations B Recording Inserting a “Memory Stick” Recording still images

Still images are recorded in JPEG format. To record still images, slide the POWER switch to the right to turn on the power and123insert a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick.” 1 2 3, 4 1 Open the “Memory Stick” cover. Slide the cover in the direction of the arrow. Access lamp 2 Insert the “Memory Stick.” Insert the “Memory Stick” with the Bmark facing toward the “Memory Stick” 1 2 slot as illustrated until it clicks. 3 Close the “Memory Stick” cover. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL. 2 Select the recording media using the MS/FD selector. Removing the “Memory Stick” MS: When recording on the “Memory Stick.” Open the “Memory Stick” cover, then push the “Memory Stick” once lightly. FD: When recording on the floppy disk. Notes 3 Press and hold the shutter button halfway down. • If you do not insert the “Memory Stick” firmly until it clicks, a message such as “MEMORY The beeps sound and the image is frozen. However, the image has not been STICK ERROR” will be displayed. recorded yet. While the AE lock indicator z is flashing, the camera • Never remove the “Memory Stick,” turn off the power, or change the position of the MS/FD automatically adjusts the exposure and focus of the captured image. When the selector while the access lamp is lit up. camera finishes the automatic adjustments, the AE lock indicator z stops • You cannot record or edit images on a “Memory Stick” if the write-protect switch is set to the flashing, then lights up, and the camera is ready for recording. LOCK position. If you release the shutter button, the recording will be canceled. Terminal AE lock indicator (green) flashes t lights up Write-protect

LOCK

switch Label space The position or shape of the write-protect switch depends on the type of the “Memory Stick.” “Memory Stick” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation. 17 18 1-4 Getting started Getting started, 4 Press the shutter button fully down. Turning off the LCD screen The shutter clicks. “RECORDING” appears on the LCD screen or on the Press LCD ON/OFF switch to turn off the LCD screen. The battery life will be finder, and the image will be recorded on the floppy disk or the “Memory longer. Stick.” When “RECORDING” disappears from the LCD screen or finder, you can start the next recording. LCD ON/OFF RECORDING switch Notes • You cannot turn off the LCD screen when [DEMO] is set to [ON] in the menu settings. For the number of images you can record on a floppy disk or a • When both the LCD screen and the finder display are turned off, you can only use followings: “Memory Stick” —LCD ON/OFF switch —POWER switch See page 48. —PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector Notes —Shutter button —MS/FD selector • When recording bright subjects, the color of the LCD screen may change after the —STEADY SHOT ON/OFF switch AE is locked. However, this will not affect the recorded image. —FOCUS AUTO/MANUAL switch • While the image is being recorded on a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick,” the access —Focus ring lamp lights. When this lamp is lit, do not shake or strike the camera. Also, do not turn the power off, not change the position of the MS/FD selector, or not remove the battery pack/floppy disk/“Memory Stick.” Otherwise, an image data breakdown Checking the last recorded image (Quick Review) may occur and the floppy disk or the “Memory Stick” may become unusable. You can check the last recorded image by clearing the menu bar from the screen • When you press the shutter button fully down at once, the camera starts recording (page 41) and pressing b on the control button. after the automatic adjustment is complete. However, the recording cannot be To return to the normal recording mode: press the shutter button lightly, or select carried out while the lamp (page 8) is flashing. (During this time, the camera is [RETURN] with b/B on the control button and then press the center z. charging the flash.) To delete the image: first select [DELETE] on the Quick Review screen with b/B on the control button and press the center z, and then select [OK] with v/V on the Recording images with the finder control button and press the center z. Turn the finder adjustment dial until the image appears clearly within the finder, then record the image. Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen Adjust the brightness with the [LCD BRIGHT] item in the menu settings (page 47). Finder adjustment dial This adjustment does not affect the brightness of the images recorded on the floppy disk or the “Memory Stick.” Note The finder display is automatically turned off when your face is not near the finder. 19 20 Using the zoom feature Activating the SteadyShot function When the SteadyShot function is working, the camera compensates for camera- shake. Zoom lever T side: for W side: for wide- telephoto angle (subject STEADY SHOT (subject appears farther ON/OFF switch appears closer) away) Set the STEADY SHOT ON/OFF switch to ON. The (SteadyShot) indicator If you cannot get a sharp focus on a close subject appears on the LCD screen or on the finder. Slide the zoom lever to the W side and move closer to the subject until the focus is sharp (page 54). Notes • The SteadyShot function will not correct excessive camera-shake. • If you use a wide conversion lens (not supplied), this lens may influence the SteadyShot Minimum focal distance to the subject function. W side:About 25 cm (9 7/8 inches) T side: About 80 cm (31 1/2 inches) To record even closer subjects, see page 54. The indicators on the LCD screen or on the finder during recording Digital zoom function Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen or on the finder. See This camera has a digital zoom function. page 89 for a detailed description of the indicators. Digital zoom enlarges the image by digital processing, and it starts to function when the zoom exceeds 10×. W T The T-side of the bar shows the digital zooming zone . DISPLAY Notes Using digital zoom • You cannot turn off the (self-timer) indicator and some of the indicators used in advanced operations. • The maximum zoom magnification is 20×. • The indicators on the LCD screen or on the finder are not recorded. • Digital zooming deteriorates the picture quality. When digital zoom is not necessary, set [DIGITAL ZOOM] to [OFF] in the menu settings (page 45). Note Digital zoom does not work for moving images. 21 22 1-5 BBBB Recording B Recording, Using the self-timer Notes • The recommended shooting distance is 0.6 to 2.5 m (23 5/8 inches to 8 1/3 feet). When you use the self-timer function, the subject is recorded 10 seconds after you • Attaching a conversion lens (not supplied) may block the light from the flash and the recorded press the shutter button. image may be eclipsed. • You cannot use the built-in flash and an external strobe at the same time. Self-timer lamp • The indicator appears when the flash is not popped up under situations that you should usethe flash. Control button • Auto red-eye reduction may not produce the desired red-eye reduction effects depending on individual differences, the distance to the subject, if the subject does not see the pre-strobe, Shutter button or other conditions. In addition, red-eye reduction effects are also difficult to obtain if you select a slow shutter speed in shutter priority mode of the PROGRAM AE function. • The flash effect is not obtained easily when you use forced flash in a bright location. Select on the LCD screen or on the finder with b/B/v/V on the control button, then press the center z. The (self-timer) indicator appears on the LCD screen or on the finder, and the subject is recorded 10 seconds after you press the shutter button. The self-timer lamp flashes after you press the shutter button until the image is recorded. Recording images with the flash Press OPEN (FLASH) to pop up the flash. The initial setting is AUTO (no indication). In this mode, the flash automatically strobes when the surroundings become dark. To change the flash mode, press (Flash) repeatedly so that the flash mode indicator appears on the LCD screen or on the finder. This setting can be set only when the flash is popped up.

OPEN

(FLASH) (Flash) Each time you press the button, the indicator changes as follows. (No indication) tttt(No indication) Auto red-eye reduction : The flash strobes before recording to reduce the red- eye phenomenon. Forced flash : The flash strobes regardless of the surrounding brightness. No flash : The flash does not strobe. You can change the amount of the flash light with [FLASH LEVEL] in the menu settings (page 46). 23 24 B Playback

Recording moving images Playing back still images

Moving images with audio are recorded in MPEG format. To record moving images, slide the POWER switch to the right to turn on the power and insert a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick.” Access lamp 3, 4 2 Control button121Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to PLAY. The last recorded image (still or moving) appears on the LCD screen or on the finder. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to MOVIE. 2 Select the playback media using the MS/FD selector. MS: When playing back images in the “Memory Stick.” FD: When playing back images in the floppy disk. 2 Select the recording media using the MS/FD selector. MS: When recording on the “Memory Stick.” 3 Press v on the control button to display the menu bar on the LCD FD: When recording on the floppy disk. screen or on the finder. 3 Press the shutter button fully down. 4 Select the desired still image with the "b/B" “REC” appears on the LCD screen or finder, and the image and sound are control button. 120min 640 6/8 recorded on the floppy disk or “Memory Stick.” Press v/V/b/B on the control button to select "b/B" If you press the shutter button momentarily on the LCD screen or on the finder, then press b/B. The image and sound are recorded for 5 seconds. The recording time can be set "b: To display the preceding image. to 10 or 15 seconds with [REC TIME SET] in the menu settings (page 45). B": To display the next image. INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP If you hold the shutter button down SELECT FILE BACK/NEXT The image and sound are recorded while the shutter button is held down for up to 60 seconds. However, when [IMAGE SIZE] in the menu settings is set to When the menu bar is n ot displa yed [320×240], the maximum recording time is 15 seconds (page 48). You can directly select and play back the image with b/B on the control button. Notes Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen, zooming or using the self-timer • You might not be able to correctly play back images recorded with this camera on other equipment. • You may not be able to play back images whose image sizes are larger than the maximum See pages 20 to 23. image size that can be used with this camera for recording. LCD screen or finder indicators during recording LCD screen or finder indicators during still image playback Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen or on the finder. Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen or on the finder. These indicators are not recorded. See page 89 for a detailed description of the indicators. See page 90 for a detailed description of the indicators. 25 26 1-6 BBBB Recording BBBB Recording,

Playing back moving images 5 Select the B (playback) button on the LCD B (playback)/

screen or on the finder with v/V/b/B on X (pause) button the control button, then press the center z. 120min 160 6/8 0:05 The moving image and sound are played back. During playback, B (playback) changes to X Access lamp (pause). INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP SELECT OK 3–5 2 Control button Playback bar To pause playback 1 Select X (pause) on the LCD screen or on the finder with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the center z. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to PLAY. When the menu bar is not displayed The last recorded image (still or moving) appears on the LCD screen or on the You can directly select the image with b/B on the control button, and play back the finder. image and sound by pressing the center z. When you press the center z during playback, playback is paused. 2 Select the playback media using the MS/FD selector. MS: When playing back images in the “Memory Stick.” Adjusting the volume FD: When playing back images in the floppy disk. Press VOL +/– to adjust the volume. 3 Press v on the control button to display the menu bar on the LCD screen or on the finder. LCD screen or finder indicators during moving image playback 4 Select the desired moving image with the control button. "b/B" Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen or on the finder. Moving images are displayed one size smaller than See page 90 for a detailed description of the indicators.120min 160 6/8 still images. Press v/V/b/B on the control button to select "b/ B" on the LCD screen or on the finder, then press b/B. "b: To display the preceding image. INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP SELECT FILE BACK/NEXT B": To display the next image. 27 28

Viewing images using a xRecommended computer environment

computer Recommended Windows environment OS:Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional You can view or modify data recorded with your camera using application software The above OS is required to be installed at the factory. on a computer, or attach it to an E-mail. Operation is not assured in an environment upgraded to the operating systems described above. CPU:MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster Viewing images using a floppy disk drive The USB connector must be provided as standard. For Windows 98 users Recommended Macintosh environment Macintosh computer with the Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0 1 Start up your computer and insert the floppy disk into the disk The above OS is required to be installed at the factory. drive of your computer. However, note that the update to Mac OS 9.0 should be used for the following models with the 2 Open [ My Computer] and double-click [ 3 1/2 Floppy (A:)]. Mac OS 8.6 standard installation at the factory: iMac with a slot loading type CD-ROM drive, iBook, Power Mac G4 The USB connector must be provided as standard. 3 Double-click the desired data file. Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is Notes recommended when playing back an audio file or a moving image. If you play • Operations are not guaranteed for either the Windows or Macintosh environment if you connect back the file directly from the floppy disk, the image and sound may break off. two or more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time (except for the USB keyboard and mouse which are provided as standard), or when using a hub. • Depending on the type of USB equipment that is used simultaneously, some equipment may not operate. Viewing images on a computer connected using the USB cable • Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments mentioned above. This section describes the method for viewing images on a computer using the supplied USB cable. • Windows and ActiveMovie, DirectShow are either registered trademarks or trademarks of What is the USB connection? : You can connect the camera to your computer Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. using the USB cable, to view or modify the images stored in a floppy disk or • Macintosh and Mac OS, QuickTime are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple “Memory Stick.” Computer, Inc. To make the USB connection: You have to install the USB driver in your • All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of computer beforehand. their respective companies. Furthermore, “™” and “®” are not mentioned in each case in this Be sure to also see the operation manuals for your computer and application manual. software. Notes • Data recorded with your camera is stored in the following formats. Make sure that applications that support these file formats are installed on your computer. —Still images (other than TEXT mode, uncompressed mode and Clip Motion): JPEG format —Moving images/audio: MPEG format —Uncompressed mode still images: TIFF format —TEXT mode/Clip Motion: GIF format • ActiveMovie Player (DirectShow) must be installed (to play back moving pictures). • QuickTime 3.2 or newer must be installed (to play back moving pictures). 29 30 1-7 BBBB Playback BBBB Playback, xInstalling the USB driver 9 Follow the on-screen messages to recognize the hardware. Do not connect your camera to your computer before installing the The Add Hardware Wizard starts twice because two different USB drivers are USB driver. installed. Be sure to allow the installation to complete without interrupting it. If the message appears after the installation to verify that you restart the First, install the USB driver to the computer. The USB driver is contained together computer, restart the computer. with application software for viewing images on a CD-ROM which is supplied with your camera. If the drive is not recognized properly, see “Troubleshooting” on page 79. For Macintosh users For Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me and Windows 1 Turn on your computer and allow the Mac OS to load. 2000 Professional users 2 Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. 1 Make sure that the camera is not connected to your computer. Do not connect the USB cable in this step. 3 Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon to open the window. 2 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load. 4 Double-click the icon of the hard disk containing the “System Folder” to open the window. 3 Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. The application software screen appears. 5 Move the following two files from the window opened in step3 to the “System Folder” icon in the window opened in step4 (drag 4 Click “USB Driver Installation for Windows 98/98SE, Windows Me, and drop). Windows 2000”. • Sony USB Driver USB driver installation starts. • Sony USB Shim 5 Follow the on-screen messages to install the USB driver. 6 When “Put these items into the Extensions folder?” appears, click If the message appears after the installation to verify that you restart the “OK.” computer, restart the computer. 7 Restart your computer and connect the USB cable. 6 Connect the USB jack (mini-B) on your camera with the USB connector on your computer using the supplied USB cable. To the USB To the USB connector jack Push the connector as far USB cable as it will go Computer 7 Insert a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” into your camera, and set the MS/FD selector to the appropriate position according to the media inserted. 8 Connect the AC power adaptor and turn on your camera. “USB MODE” appears on the LCD screen or on the finder of your camera and the camera is set to communication standby mode. Your computer recognizes the camera, and the Windows Add Hardware Wizard starts. 31 32 xViewing images 6 Select and double-click the desired image/audio file from the folder. For Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me and Windows For the detailed folder and file name, see “Image file storage destinations and 2000 Professional users image file names” (page 36). 1 Turn on the power of your computer and allow Windows to load. When viewing an image in a floppy disk 2 Connect one end of the supplied USB cable to the USB jack (mini- B) on the camera and the other end to the USB connector on your Desired file type Double-click in this order computer. Audio* “Voice” folder t Audio file* E-mail image “E-mail” folder t Image file Other files Image file To the USB To the USB connector jack When viewing an image in a “Memory Stick ” Desired file type Double-click in this order Push the connector Still image “Dcim” folder t “100msdcf” folder t Image file USB cable as far as it will go Computer Moving image* “Mssony” folder t “Moml0001” folder t Image file* Audio* “Mssony” folder t “Momlv100” folder t Audio file* 3 Insert a floppy disk or “Memory Stick” into your camera, and set Clip Motion “Dcim” folder t “100msdcf” folder t Image file the MS/FD selector to the appropriate position according to the image media inserted. E-mail image “Mssony” folder t “Imcif100” folder t Image file 4 Connect the AC power adaptor to your camera and then to a wall TIFF image outlet (mains) and turn on the power of your camera. (uncompressed) “USB MODE” appears on the LCD screen or on the finder of the camera. ∗ Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is recommended. If 5 Open “My Computer” on Windows and double-click the newly you play back the file directly from the floppy disk or “Memory Stick,” the image and recognized drive, “Removable Disk”(Example (D:)∗). sound may break off. The folders inside the floppy disk or “Memory Stick” are displayed. If the drive is not recognized properly, see “Troubleshooting” on page 79. ∗ Drive identifier depends on your computer. For Windows Me or Windows 2000 Professional users When using Windows Me or Windows 2000 Professional, the following procedures are recommended when disconnecting the USB cable from your computer, ejecting the floppy disk or “Memory Stick” from the camera, or changing the position of the MS/FD selector, while it is connected to your computer. 1 Stop the drive by clicking on the “Unplug/Eject” icon in the task tray. 2 Carry out the operation after the message, confirming the safe removal of the hardware, appears. 33 34 1-8 BBBB Playback BBBB Playback, Notes on using your computer Image file storage destinations Floppy disk/“Memory Stick” and image file names • Format the floppy disk or “Memory Stick” only using this camera (page 72). You cannot format the floppy disk or “Memory Stick” using Image files recorded with your camera are grouped in folders by recording mode. a computer via the USB cable. Images in a floppy disk and ones in a “Memory Stick” have different file names. The • Use only a DOS/V 2HD format floppy disk. Other disks will not be recognized by a meanings of the file names are as follows. computer. • Do not optimize the “Memory Stick” on a Windows machine. This will shorten the When using floppy disks “Memory Stick” life. • Do not compress the data on the floppy disk or “Memory Stick.” Compressed files sss stands for any number within the range from 001 to 999. cannot be played back on your camera. f stands for one of the following characters below. Software S: Still image file recorded at 640×480 size F: Still image file of more than 640×480 size • Depending on your application software, the file size may increase when you open V: Moving image file recorded at 160×112 size a still image file. W: Moving image file recorded at 320×240 size • When you load an image modified using the supplied retouching software from T: Still image file recorded in TEXT mode your computer to the camera or when you directly modify the image on the camera, C: Clip Motion file recorded in NORMAL mode the image format will differ so the “FILE ERROR” message may appear and you M: Clip Motion file recorded in MOBILE mode may be unable to open the file. • Depending on your application software, only the first frame of a Clip Motion For Windows 98 users (The drive recognizing the floppy disk is image may be displayed. [A].) Communications with your computer Storage destination containing still image, Communications between your camera and your computer may not recover after moving image, TEXT mode image and Clip recovering from Standby or Sleep. Motion image data Folder containing E-mail mode image data Other Folder containing VOICE mode audio data When connecting the camera to a computer or when using an external power source, remove the battery pack from inside the camera. 35 36 When using “Memory Stick”s Location File Meaning 3 1/2 Floppy MVC-sssf.JPG • Still image file recorded normally ssss stands for any number within the range from 0001 to 9999. [A:] • Still image file recorded in For Windows 98 users (The drive recognizing the camera is — E-MAIL mode (page 51) “ D.” ) — VOICE mode (page 51) MVC-sssf.411 • INDEX display file This file can only be played back on your camera. Folder containing still image recorded in MVC-sssf.MPG • Moving image file normal mode, TEXT mode image and Clip Motion image data MVC-sssf.GIF • Still image file recorded in Folder containing E-MAIL mode and TIFF — TEXT mode (page 52) mode image data — Clip Motion (page 49) Folder containing moving image data MVC-sssf.THM • Index image file recorded in Folder containing VOICE mode audio data — TEXT mode (page 52) — Clip Motion (page 49) E-mail folder MVC-sssE.JPG • Small-size image file recorded in E- Folder File Meaning MAIL mode (page 51) 100msdcf DSC0ssss.JPG • Still image file recorded normally Voice folder MVC-sssA.MPG • Audio file recorded in VOICE mode • Still image file recorded in (page 51) — E-MAIL mode (page 51) • The numerical portions of the following files are the same. — TIFF mode (page 53) —An image file recorded in E-MAIL mode and its corresponding small-size image file — VOICE mode (page 51) —An audio file recorded in VOICE mode and its corresponding image file CLP0ssss.GIF • Clip Motion file recorded in NORMAL —An image file recorded in TEXT mode and its corresponding index image file mode (page 49) —An image file recorded with Clip Motion and its corresponding index image file • INDEX display files other than the TEXT mode and Clip Motion files are played back only on this CLP0ssss.THM • Index image file of Clip Motion file camera. recorded in NORMAL mode MBL0ssss.GIF • Clip Motion file recorded in MOBILE mode (page 49) MBL0ssss.THM • Index image file of Clip Motion file recorded in MOBILE mode TXT0ssss.GIF • Still image file recorded in TEXT mode (page 52) TXT0ssss.THM • Index image file of still image file recorded in TEXT mode 37 38 1-9 B Playback BBBB Playback,

Advanced operations

Folder File Meaning Before performing advanced Imcif100 DSC0ssss.JPG • Small-size image file recorded in E- MAIL mode (page 51) operations DSC0ssss.TIF • Uncompressed image file recorded in TIFF mode (page 53) This section describes the basic control methods that are frequently used for Moml0001 MOV0ssss.MPG • Moving image file recorded normally “Advanced operations.” Momlv100 DSC0ssss.MPG • Audio file recorded in VOICE mode (page 51) The numerical portions of the following files are the same. How to use the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector —A small-size image file recorded in E-MAIL mode and its corresponding image file —An uncompressed image file recorded in TIFF mode and its corresponding image file The PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector selects whether you can use your camera to —An audio file recorded in VOICE mode and its corresponding image file record or play back and edit images. Set the selector as follows before starting to —An image file recorded in TEXT mode and its corresponding index image file operate your camera. —An image file recorded with Clip Motion and its corresponding index image file

PLAY

Tips

STILL

The digital still camera saves recorded images as digital data. The format of the

MOVIE

saved data is called as the file format. The formats that can be used with this PLAY: To play back or edit camera are as follows: images JPEG format STILL: To record still images, Most digital still cameras, operating systems of computers, and browser software VOICE images and Clip adopt this format. This format is able to compress files without appreciable Motion imagesMOVIE: To record moving deterioration. However, if the image is compressed and saved on repeated images occasions, the image will deteriorate. This camera records still images using the JPEG format for normal recording. GIF format Using this format, the image will not deteriorate even if the image is compressed How to use the control button and saved on repeated occasions. This format limits the number of colors to 256 colors. This camera records still images using the GIF format in Clip Motion The control button is used to select the buttons, images and menus displayed on the (page 49) or TEXT mode (page 52). LCD screen or on the finder of your camera and modify the settings. The operation methods that are frequently used for “Advanced operations” are described below. TIFF format Stores shooting images without compression, so the image does not deteriorate. Most of operating systems and applications correspond to this format. This camera records still images using the TIFF format for the TIFF mode (page 53). Select Set (enter) MPEG format This format is very typical for moving images. This camera records audio using the MPEG format for the moving images recording and the VOICE mode (page 51). 39 40 Turning on/off the operation buttons (menu bar) on the LCD screen or on the finder How to change the menu settings Some of the advanced operations for your camera are executed by selecting menu Press v to display the menu bar items displayed on the LCD screen or on the finder with the control button. on the LCD screen or on the finder. Press to clear the menu bar INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUPV SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF from the LCD screen or on the finder. Menu bar Note 1–3 You cannot clear the menu bar on the INDEX screen (page 61). Control button Selecting items or images on the LCD screen or on the finder PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector 1 Press v/V/b/B on the control button to select the item you 1 Press v on the control button to display the menu bar. want to set or the image you The menu bar appears as follows according to the position of the PLAY/STILL/ want to display. MOVIE selector. The color of the selected item or the STILL/MOVIE PLAY (single mode) PLAY (INDEX mode) frame of the selected image INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP changes from blue to yellow. SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF 2 Press the center z to enter the item. Repeat steps1 and2 to execute VIDEO OUT /LANGUAGEMVC– 001F20017410: 30PMeach function. CLOCK SET EFFECT FILE CAMERA SETUP INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP BEEP SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF SELECT SINGLE DISPLAY LCD BRIGHT INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP SELECT CLOSE 2 Select the desired item with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the center z. The color of the selected item changes from blue to yellow, and when you press the center z, the settings VIDEO OUT NTSC /LANGUAGE

The “Advanced operations” section of this manual refers to that can be set for its item are displayed. CLOCK SETBEEP

LCD BRIGHT selecting and entering items by the above procedure as Note INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP “Select [item name].” The displayed items are changed according to the position SELECT OK of the MS/FD selector. 3 Select the desired setting with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the center z. To cancel the setup Press V on the control button repeatedly until the LCD screen or finder returns to the menu bar display in step1. To clear the menu bar, press V again. 41 42 1-10 Playback Before performing advanced operationsBBBB, Menu settings Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ Menu items that can be modified differ depending on the positions of the PLAY/ MOVIE selector STILL/MOVIE selector or the MS/FD selector. The LCD screen or the finder shows FORMAT OK Formats a “Memory Stick.” Once you PLAY only the items you can operate at the moment. Initial settings are indicated with x. (When the format the “Memory Stick,” all of the STILL MS/FD data, including protected images are MOVIE (self-timer) selector is deleted. Be sure to check for images Records with the self-timer (page 23). set to MS.) before you format a “Memory Stick.” CANCEL Cancels formatting of a “Memory EFFECT Stick.” Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ FILE SERIES Assigns numbers to files in sequence STILL MOVIE selector NUMBER even if the floppy disk or “Memory MOVIE Stick” is changed. Note that file P. EFFECT SOLARIZE Sets the image special effects (page 60). STILL numbers are not in sequence between a B&W MOVIE floppy disk and “Memory Stick.”

SEPIA

xNORMAL Resets the file number that starts from NEG.ART 001 or 0001 each time the floppy disk or xOFF “Memory Stick” is changed. DATE/ DAY & Sets whether to insert the date and time STILL CLIP Sets the image size and number of STILL TIME TIME into the image (page 60). MOTION frames for creating GIF format DATE animation (page 49). xOFF 160×120 Up to 10 frames can be recorded. (NORMAL) FILE 80×72 Up to 2 frames can be recorded.(MOBILE) Item-1 Item-2 Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ CANCEL Cancels Clip Motion. MOVIE selector IMAGE x1600× 1200 Selects the image size when recording STILL DISK FORMAT OK Formats a floppy disk (page 72). PLAY SIZE 1600 (3:2) still images. TOOL Once you format a floppy disk, STILL (When the (When the all of the data, including 1600 (ECM) MOVIE MS/FD MS/FD protected images are deleted. Be 1024×768selector is selector is sure to check for images before 640×480set to FD.) set to FD.) you format a floppy disk. IMAGE x1600 (FINE) Selects the image size when recording STILL CANCEL Cancels formatting of a floppy SIZE 1600 (3:2) F still images.disk. (When the 1024 (FINE) DISK OK Copies all data stored in a floppy MS/FD 640 (FINE) COPY disk to another disk (page 70). selector is CANCEL Cancels the disk copy. set to MS.) CANCEL Goes back to the [DISK TOOL] IMAGE 320×240 Selects the MPEG image size when MOVIE item. SIZE x160×112 recording moving images. 43 44 Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ MOVIE selector MOVIE selector FLASH HIGH Makes the flash level higher than STILL REC MODE TIFF Records a TIFF (uncompressed) file in STILL LEVEL normal. addition to the JPEG file when the MS/ xNORMAL Normal setting. FD selector is set to MS. LOW Makes the flash level lower than normal. TEXT Records a GIF file in black-and-white. EXPOSURE +2.0EV to Adjusts the exposure before recording. STILL VOICE Records an audio file (with a still image) –2.0EV MOVIE in addition to the JPEG file. E-MAIL Records a small-size (320×240) JPEG TOOL file in addition to the selected image size. Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ xNORMAL Records an image using the normal MOVIE selector recording mode. COPY FD t FD Copies the image to a floppy disk. PLAY REC TIME 15 sec Selects the recording time for moving MOVIE (When the FD t MS Copies the image to a “Memory Stick.” SET images. MS/FD10 sec selector is CANCEL Cancels copying of the image (page 68). x5 sec set to FD.) SLIDE INTERVAL Sets the slide show interval. PLAY COPY MS t MS Copies the image to a “Memory Stick.” PLAY SHOW x3 sec/5 sec/10 sec/30 sec/1 min (When the MS t FD Copies the image to a floppy disk. (Only in MS/FD PLAY REPEAT A slide show can be repeated. (When selector is CANCEL Cancels copying of the image (page 68). (single) using the floppy disk, a slide show is up set to MS.) mode) to approx. 20 minutes) xON/OFF RESIZE 1600× 1200 Changes the recorded image size in PLAY (When the 1024×768 PLAY (single) mode (page 67). START Starts the slide show. MS/FD 640×480 CANCEL Cancels the slide show settings or selector is CANCEL execution. set to FD.) PRINT ON Marks the still images to be printed PLAY RESIZE 1600 (FINE) Changes the recorded image size in PLAY MARK (page 71). (When the 1024 (FINE) PLAY (single) mode (page 67). xOFF Unmarks the print mark of the still MS/FD 640 (FINE) images. selector is CANCEL set to MS.) PROTECT ON Protects images against accidental PLAY erasure (page 65). SETUP xOFF Releases protection of images. Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ MOVIE selector CAMERA DEMO xSTBY/ON Displayed only when you use the AC STILL Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ OFF power adaptor in STILL or MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE selector mode. When [ON] is selected, a demonstration will start if you do not DIGITAL xON Uses digital zoom. STILL operate your camera for about 10 ZOOM OFF Does not use digital zoom. minutes. To stop the demonstration, turn SHARPNESS +2 to –2 Adjusts the sharpness of the image. STILL off your camera. The indicator appears (except when the setting is 0). 1-11 Before performing advanced operations Before performing advanced operations, Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ B Various recording ∗ The image is recorded in the ratio of MOVIE selector three to two to fit the printing paper VIDEO NTSC Sets the video output signal to NTSC PLAY Setting the image size size. Using this image size, the OUT mode (e.g., Japan, the USA). STILL (IMAGE SIZE) margin of an image is not printed out.However, the slight amount of the PAL Sets the video output signal to PAL MOVIE upper and lower of the image being mode (e.g., Europe). displayed on the LCD screen or on the finder is not recorded. / xENGLISH Displays the menu items in English. PLAY LANGUAGE 1/JPN Displays the menu items in Japanese. STILL Moving image sizes: MOVIE 320×240, 160×112 CLOCK — Sets the date and time (page 14). PLAY SET STILL 2, 3 The number of images or the time MOVIE that you can record on a floppy BEEP SHUTTER Turns on the shutter sound only. (The PLAY 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE disk or “Memory Stick” (8 MB) shutter sound is heard when you press STILL selector to STILL or MOVIE. Image size Number of images or time* the shutter button.) MOVIE 2 Select [FILE] and then Floppy disk “Memory Stick” xON Turns on the beep/shutter sound (when [IMAGE SIZE] from the menu. you press the control button/shutter 1600×1200 Approx. 4 Approx. 8 button). 3 Select the desired image 1600 (3:2) Approx. 4 Approx. 8 size. OFF Turns off the beep/shutter sound. 1600 (ECM) Approx. 8 — LCD Adjusts the LCD screen brightness PLAY Still image size: 1024×768 Approx. Approx. BRIGHT using +/- on the LCD screen or on the STILL • When the MS/FD selector is set 10 20 finder. to FDMOVIE 1600×1200, 1600 (3:2)*, 640×480 Approx. Approx. 1600 (ECM), 1024×768, 30 48 INDEX (Only in PLAY (single) mode) 640×480 320×240 Approx. Approx. Displays six images at a time (PLAY (INDEX) mode). 15 sec 80 sec (ECM): The image quality (15 sec)** DELETE (Only in PLAY (single) mode) deteriorates, however, the number of images you can record increases. If 160×112 Approx. Approx. Setting Description PLAY/STILL/MOVIE you give priority to the image quality, 60 sec 320 sec selector select [1600×1200]. (60 sec)** OK Deletes the displayed image. PLAY • When the MS/FD selector is set ∗ When REC MODE is set to NORMAL. CANCEL Cancels deleting of the image. to MS ∗∗ The maximum recording time in 1600 (FINE), 1600 (3:2)F*, continuous recording 1024 (FINE), 640 (FINE) (Return) (Only in PLAY (INDEX) mode) Returns to PLAY (single) mode. (FINE): The quality of the image recorded in a “Memory Stick” is higher than the image recorded in a floppy disk even if the image size is same. Also, the file size recorded in a “Memory Stick” is larger than the file recorded in a floppy disk. 47 48 Notes 4 Record the image for the first Notes• If you try to record 55 images or more on a Creating Clip Motion frame. • Reading and writing data takes more time floppy disk, even if the remaining disk Files than normal image recording. capacity is sufficient, “DISK FULL” 160 62/10 • Due to the limitations of the GIF format, appears on the LCD screen or on the finder Clip Motion is an animation function the number of colors for Clip Motion and you cannot record any more images. that plays back still images in images is reduced to 256 colors or less.• If you try to record 3001 images or more Therefore, the picture quality may on a “Memory Stick,” even if the succession. Clip Motion images are deteriorate for some images. remaining memory capacity of the played back on this camera at • The file size is reduced in MOBILE mode, “Memory Stick” is sufficient, “NO approximately 0.5 s intervals. The so the picture quality deteriorates. MEMORY SPACE” appears on the LCD images are stored in GIF format, which • GIF files not created on this camera may screen or on the finder and you cannot is convenient for creating home pages not be displayed correctly. record any more images. or attaching images to an e-mail. 5 Record the image for the next • In TEXT mode, even if you select [1600 frame. (ECM)], the number of images you can Image recording can be repeated record is equal with the number in 4, 5 up to the maximum number of [1600×1200]. recordable frames. Tips 1 The frame images are The size of the image is indicated by the automatically recorded on the pixel unit. The higher the number of floppy disk or “Memory Stick” pixels, the more information is included. 2, 3 when you select [FINISH] or after So, an image that is saved using a large recording the maximum number of number of pixels is suitable for a large- frames. format print and one that is saved usinga1Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE smaller number of pixels is suitable for selector to STILL. To stop Clip Motion creation attaching to an E-mail. Normally, an image is recorded in the ratio of four to 2 Select [FILE] and then [CLIP Select [RETURN] after step 3. three to fit the monitor ratio. This camera MOTION] from the menu. Note that if you record even one frame, can also record the image in the ratio of you cannot stop Clip Motion creation. three to two to accommodate the most 3 Select the desired mode. common printing paper size. This is the The number of Clip Motion frames same ratio as the one used in photo- 160×120 (NORMAL) that you can record on a floppy developing shops. Clip Motion of up to 10 frames can disk or “Memory Stick” (8 MB) be recorded. This is suitable for use on home Image size Number of images pages, etc. Floppy disk “Memory Stick” 80×72 (MOBILE) 160×120 Approx. Approx. Clip Motion of up to 2 frames can (NORMAL) 7* 40* 1600×1200 1600 (3:2) be recorded. 80×72 Approx. Approx.This is suitable for use with (MOBILE) 54** 400** portable data terminals. ∗ When recording 10 frames per Clip CANCEL Motion file This cancels the creation of Clip ∗∗ When recording 2 frames per Clip Motion. Motion file 49 50 1-12 Before performing advanced operations BBBB Various recording, The number of images that you

Recording still Adding audio files to can record on a floppy disk or Recording text

images for e-mail (E- still images (VOICE) “Memory Stick” (8 MB) in VOICE documents (TEXT)

MAIL) mode

Images in VOICE mode are recorded Image size Number of images* Text is recorded in GIF format to The E-MAIL mode records a small- in the JPEG format, and audio is provide a clear image. size (320×240) image at the same time recorded in the MPEG format. Floppy disk “Memory Stick” as a still image. Small-size images are 1600×1200 Approx. 3 Approx. 7 3 convenient for e-mail transmission, 3 1600 (3:2) Approx. 3 Approx. 7 etc. Images in E-MAIL mode are 1 recorded in the JPEG format. 1600 (ECM) Approx. 5 — 1 1024×768 Approx. 6 Approx. 3 17 2 640×480 Approx. Approx. 1 2 12 34 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE ∗ When recording 5-second audio. selector to STILL. 2 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL. To return to normal 2 Select [FILE], [REC MODE],and then [TEXT] from the 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE 2 recording mode Select [FILE], [REC MODE], menu. selector to STILL. and then [VOICE] from the Select [NORMAL] in step 2. 2 menu. 3 Record the image. Select [FILE], [REC MODE], and then [E-MAIL] from the 3 Record the image. menu. If you press and release the The number of images that you 3 Record the image. shutter button, sound is can record on a floppy disk or recorded for five seconds. “Memory Stick” (8 MB) in TEXT If you hold down the shutter mode The number of images that you button, sound is recorded until Image size Number of images* can record on a floppy disk or you release the shutter button for up to 40 seconds. Floppy disk “Memory Stick”“Memory Stick” (8 MB) in E-MAIL mode 1600×1200 Minimum Minimum 4 25 Image size Number of images 1600 (3:2) Minimum Minimum Floppy disk “Memory Stick” 5 28 1600×1200 Approx. 3 Approx. 8 1600 (ECM) Minimum — 1600 (3:2) Approx. 3 Approx. 8 4 1600 (ECM) Approx. 7 — 1024×768 Minimum Minimum 11 61 1024×768 Approx. 8 Approx. 20 640×480 Minimum Minimum 28 160 640×480 Approx. Approx. 22 44 ∗ The maximum number of recordable images depends on the document To return to normal condition, such as the amount of textportions. recording mode Select [NORMAL] in step 2. 51 52 To return to normal Notes recording mode Recording still • JPEG images are recorded in the image Recording images in Select [NORMAL] in step 2. images as size selected by the [IMAGE SIZE] menu macro uncompressed files (page 48). TIFF images are recorded in Notes [1600×1200] size other than when [1600(TIFF) 1(3:2)F] is selected.• If the subject is not evenly illuminated, you • Writing data takes more time than in may be unable to record a clear image. normal recording. • Writing and reading data take more time This mode simultaneously records still than normal recording. images in both TIFF format (uncompressed) and JPEG format 2 (compressed) when using a “Memory 3 Stick.” 4 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL or MOVIE. 1 2 Set the FOCUS AUTO/ MANUAL switch to AUTO. 2 3 Press (macro).3 The (macro) indicator appears on the LCD screen or on the finder. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE With the zoom lever set to the W selector to STILL. side, you can shoot a subject that is about 2 cm (13/16 inch) away from 2 Set the MS/FD selector to MS. the lens surface in macro mode. 3 Select [FILE], [REC MODE], and then [TIFF] from the To return to normal menu. recording mode 4 Record the image. Press again. The indicator disappears. The number of images that you Notes can record on a “Memory Stick” • You cannot record images in macro with (8 MB) in TIFF mode the following PROGRAM AE modes: —Landscape mode Image size Number of images —Panfocus mode 1600×1200 1 • You cannot record images in macro if the indicator appears. 1600 (3:2) 1 To return to normal recording mode Select [NORMAL] in step 3. 53 54 1-13 BBBB Various recording BBBB Various recording, Notes

Focusing manually • Focal point information may not Using the PROGRAM Twilight mode

completely show the correct distance. Use AE function Suppresses the blurring of colorsNormally the focus is automatically the information as a guide. of a bright subject in a dark place adjusted. This function is useful when • Focal point information does not show the so that you can record the subject the auto focus does not work well such correct distance when attaching the 1 without losing the dark atmosphere as in dark places. conversion lens. of the surroundings. • If you shoot a subject within 0.8m1(31 1/2 inches) while the zoom lever is set to T side, you cannot get a clear focus. In 2 Twilight plus mode such cases, the focal point information Increases the effectiveness of the flashes. Move the zoom lever to the W side twilight mode function. 2 until the indicator stops flashing. • You cannot use this function if you have PROGRAM AE +/– Landscape mode 3 selected the Panfocus mode in the Focuses only on a distant subject PROGRAM AE function. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE to record landscapes, etc. selector to STILL or MOVIE. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE 2 Press PROGRAM AE Panfocus modeselector to STILL or MOVIE. repeatedly to select the Changes the focus quickly and 2 Set the FOCUS AUTO/ desired PROGRAM AE mode. simply from a close subject to a MANUAL switch to MANUAL. distant subject. The 9 (manual focus) indicator Aperture priority mode appears on the LCD screen or on For making the subject stand out the finder. To cancel PROGRAM AEagainst an unclear background or Press PROGRAM AE repeatedly until 3 Turn the focus ring to achieve making both the subject and the the indicator on the LCD screen or on a sharp focus. background stand out clearly. Press the finder goes out. When you shoot still images, the PROGRAM AE +/– repeatedly to image on the LCD screen or on the select an aperture value in 9 steps Notes finder is enlarged (double*) and from F2.8 to F11. • You can focus only on distant subjects inLandscape mode. the focal point information appears • In Panfocus mode, the zoom position is set while the focus is being adjusted. Shutter speed priority to the W side and focus is fixed. After adjusting, the image returns mode • When you record in Twilight plus mode, to normal size. The range is from For recording a sharp picture of a we recommend that you use a tripod to 2 cm (13/16 inch) to ∞ (infinity). fast-moving subject or recording prevent shaking.• Set the forced flash when you use the ∗ When using the digital zoom the flow of motion of a moving flash in the following modes: function, the enlarged image will be subject. – Twilight mode less than double size. Press PROGRAM AE +/– – Twilight plus mode repeatedly to select a shutter speed – Landscape mode in 17 steps from 8'' to 1/500 when • You cannot use the PROGRAM AE To reactivate auto focusing recording a still image, or in 11 function when [REC MODE] is set to Set the FOCUS AUTO/MANUAL steps from 1/8 to 1/500 when [TEXT]. • If the setting is not appropriate in aperture switch to AUTO. recording a moving image. priority mode and shutter speed priority mode, the setting value indicator on the LCD screen or on the finder flashes. In this case, reset the value. 55 56 Tips Under normal recording conditions, the Using the Spot light- Adjusting the Tips Normally, the camera automatically camera automatically makes various metering function exposure adjusts the exposure. If the color of the adjustments, such as those for the focus, Select this mode when there is (EXPOSURE) image is too dark or bright as illustrated iris, exposure, and white balance, as it below, we recommend that you adjust the shoots. However, you may not be able to backlight or when there is strong exposure manually. When the color of the carry out your desired shooting contrast between the subject and the image is too dark, set it toward +, and depending on shooting conditions. The background, etc. when it is too bright, set it toward –. program AE function provides you with 1 near-optimum adjustments to suit your shooting situation. Set the exposure

SPOT

2, 3 toward +METER 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL or MOVIE. Set the exposure 2 Select [CAMERA] and then toward – Press SPOT METER to activate the [EXPOSURE] from the menu. spot light-metering function. Position the point you want to record at the spot 3 Select the desired exposure light-metering cross hair. value. Adjust the exposure value while LCD screen/finder checking the brightness of the background. You can select values ranging from +2.0 EV to -2.0 EV in steps of 1/3 EV. Note Spot light-metering cross hair If a subject is under extremely bright or darksituations, or the flash is used, the exposure adjustment may not be effective. 57 58 1-14 BBBB Various recording BBBB Various recording, 2 Shoot a white object such as paper

Adjusting the white full under the same situation you Recording the date Enjoying picture

balance (WHITE will shoot. and time on the still effects (PICTURE

BALANCE) 3 Press . image (DATE/TIME) EFFECT)

The indicator flashes quickly. Normally the white balance is When the white balance has been 4 automatically adjusted. adjusted and stored in the memory, the indicator stops flashing. 1 1 To reactivate auto adjustment 2 Select [AUTO] in step 2. 2, 3 2, 3 Note • Select [AUTO] when shooting with 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE fluorescent lighting. selector to STILL. selector to STILL or MOVIE. • The indicator means: Slow flashing: white balance is not set. 2 Select [EFFECT] and then 2 Select [EFFECT] and then 1 Quick flashing: white balance is being [DATE/TIME] from the menu. [P. EFFECT] from the menu.Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL or MOVIE. adjusted (after you pressed ). Lit steady: white balance has been set. 3 Select the date and time. 3 Select the desired mode. 2 Press WHITE BALANCE • If the indicator keeps flashing even DAY & TIME SOLARIZE repeatedly to select the when you press , record in automatic Imposes the date, hour, and The light contrast is clearer and the desired white balance white balance mode. minute. picture looks like an illustration. setting. Tips DATE B&W The image is susceptible to lighting Imposes the year, month, and day.One-push white balance ( ) The picture is monochrome (blackconditions. The image looks blue under Adjusting the white balance OFF and white).sunlight in the summer, and looks red depending on the light source under mercury lamps. Human eyes can Does not impose the date and time. SEPIA resolve these problems. However, the 4 Record the image. The picture is sepia-toned like anOUT DOOR ( ) camera cannot resolve the problem by The date and time do not appear on old photograph. Recording a sunrise/sunset, night making adjustments. Normally, the the LCD screen or on the finder scene, neon signs, or fireworks camera adjusts it automatically, but, if the NEG.ART image appears in strange colors, we during shooting. These appear The color and brightness of the IN DOOR (n) recommend that you change the white during playback only. picture are reversed as in a • Places where the lighting balance mode. negative. condition changes quickly • Under bright lighting such as OFF photography studios Does not use the picture effect • Under sodium or mercury lamps function. AUTO (No indicator) Adjusts the white balance 200174To cancel picture effect automatically Select [OFF] in step 3. Notes To shoot in one-push white • If you select [DATE] in step 3, the date is balance mode imposed onto the image in the order selected 1 Press WHITE BALANCE with “Setting the date and time” (page 14). repeatedly until the indicator • The date and time are not imposed ontoClip Motion images. appears. 59 60

B Various playback To display the next Notes

(previous) index screen Enlarging a part of the • You cannot trim moving images, still

Playing back six Select v/V at the lower-left on the still image (Zoom and images recorded in Clip Motion, TEXT

images at once LCD screen or on the finder. trimming) mode, or uncompressed images. • Zoom scaling is up to 5× regardless of the (INDEX) original image size.3 • The quality of enlarged images may be Displays the previous index deteriorated. screen. 1 • The original data is left even if you enlarge Displays the next index screen. the image. 1 • The enlarged image is recorded as thenewest file. 2, 4 To return to normal playback 2 (single image) Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE • Select the desired image with the 1 selector to PLAY. control button. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to PLAY. • Select (Return). 2 Display the image to be enlarged. 2 Select [INDEX] on the LCD Note screen or on the finder. When viewing an image recorded in Clip 3 Zoom in/out the image with Six images are displayed at once Motion or TEXT mode on the INDEX the zoom lever. (index screen). screen, the image may appear different from The zoom scaling indicator the actual image. Only the first frame of Clip Motion appears on the LCD screen or on files is displayed. the finder. 4 Press the control button repeatedly to select the desired portion of the image. v: The image moves downwardMVC- 001F20017412: 30PMDELETE FILE TOOL SETUP V: The image moves upward SELECT SINGLE DISPLAY b: The image moves rightward This shows the position of the B: The image moves leftward currently displayed images relative to all the recorded images. To return to the normal size The following marks are displayed on each image according to the Zoom out with the zoom lever until the image type and settings. zoom scaling indicator ( ×1.1) : Moving image file disappears from the screen, or simply : VOICE mode file press the center z. : E-mail file : Print mark To record an enlarged image - : Protect mark (trimming) TEXT: TEXT file 1Enlarge the image. TIFF: TIFF file 2 Press the shutter button. The image CLIP: Clip Motion file is recorded at 640×480 size and the (No mark): Normal recording (no image on the LCD screen or on the settings) finder returns to the normal size after recording. 61 62 1-15 BBBB Various recording BBBB Various playback, To skip to the next/previous

Playing back the still image during the slide show Viewing images on a

images in order Select \b/B\ at the lower-left on the TV screen (SLIDE SHOW) LCD screen or on the finder. Before connecting your camera, be This function is useful for checking the Note sure to turn off the TV. recorded images or for presentations, The interval setting time may vary Set the TV/VIDEO etc. depending on the image size. switch to “VIDEO”. A/V connecting 2, 3 cable 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to PLAY. to A/V OUT (MONO) jack 2 Select [FILE] and then [SLIDE SHOW] from the menu. 1 Connect the A/V connecting Set the following items. cable to the A/V OUT (MONO) jack of your camera and to INTERVAL the audio/video input jacks of You can select from 1 min (one the TV. minute), 30 sec (30 seconds), If your TV has stereo type input 10 sec (10 seconds), 5 sec jacks, connect the audio plug of the (5 seconds), or 3 sec (3 seconds). A/V connecting cable to the Lch REPEAT jack. ON: Plays back images ina2Turn on the TV and start continuous loop (When using the playback on your camera. floppy disk, the slide show stops The playback image appears on the approximately 20 minutes*) until TV screen. [RETURN] is selected. OFF: After all images have been played back, the slide show ends. Note ∗ The slide show does not end until all You cannot use a TV that has an antenna the images are played back, even if it (aerial) connector only. takes more than 20 minutes. 3 Select [START]. The slide show begins. To cancel the slide show Select [CANCEL] in step 2 or 3. 63 64

B Editing 3 When you select [ALL] Deleting images 3 When you select [ALL]

Select [ON].

Preventing accidental All the images in the floppy disk or (DELETE)

Select [ENTER]. All the unprotected images are erasure (PROTECT) “Memory Stick” are protected. Protected images cannot be deleted. deleted. The - (protect) indicator appears on When you select [SELECT] When you select [SELECT] protected images. Select all the images to be Select all the images to be deleted protected with the control button, with the control button, then select then select [ENTER]. The selected 1 [ENTER]. The (delete) images are protected. indicator appears on the selected images and these images are 2, 3 deleted. 2, 3 In single mode0001- 0006/ 0040PROTECT ENTER CANCEL SELECT OK In single mode 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE0001- 0006/ 0040selector to PLAY, then DELETE ENTER CANCEL SELECT OK 1 display the image to beSet the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to PLAY, then To release protection deleted. display the image to be If you selected [ALL] in step 2, select To cancel deleting protected. Select [DELETE] and then[OFF]. If you selected [SELECT] in 2 [OK] from the menu. Select [CANCEL] in step 2 or 3. step 2, select the images to be 2 Select [FILE], [PROTECT], The image is deleted. and then [ON] from the menu. unprotected with the control button, Notethen select [ENTER]. The displayed image is protected If there are files on the “Memory Stick”with names having the same last 4 digits as and the - indicator appears. In INDEX mode the file name of the image to be deleted, these files are also deleted at the same time. To release protection 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE Select [OFF] in step 2. selector to PLAY, then display the INDEX screen. In INDEX mode 2 Select [DELETE] and then [ALL] or [SELECT] from the 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE menu. selector to PLAY, then display the INDEX screen. 2 Select [FILE], [PROTECT], and then [ALL] or [SELECT] from the menu. 65 66 1-16 BBBB Various playback BBBB Editing, Notes

Changing the • You cannot change the size of images Copying images 4 Select the media that theimage will be copied onto.

recorded still image recorded in TEXT mode, moving images, (COPY) uncompressed images, or Clip Motion • When the MS/FD selector is setsize (RESIZE) images. Copies images to another floppy disk to FD. • When you change from a small size to a or “Memory Stick.” FD t FD: Copies to the floppyUse this function when you need a large size, the picture quality deteriorates. disk small-size image to attach it to an E- FD t MS: Copies to the mail. The original image is retained In single mode “Memory Stick” even after resizing. The resized image is recorded as the newest file. • When the MS/FD selector is set to MS. 2 MS t MS: Copies to the “Memory Stick” 1 MS t FD: Copies to the floppy 5 disk 3, 4 When you select [FD t MS] or2, 3 [MS t FD], the camera automatically starts copying if the11Select the media using the floppy disk and “Memory Stick” Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE MS/FD selector. are inserted. selector to PLAY, then display the image of which 2 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE 5 Insert or change the floppyyou want to change the size. selector to PLAY, then disk or “Memory Stick” display the image to be following the messages on 2 Select [TOOL] and then copied. the LCD screen or on the [RESIZE] from the menu. finder. 3 Select [TOOL], and then “RECORDING” appears. When3 Select the desired size. [COPY] from the menu. copying is completed, • When the MS/FD selector is set “COMPLETE” appears. to FD To end copying, select [EXIT]. 1600×1200, 1024×768, 640×480. • When the MS/FD selector is set MS To continue copying th eto image to other floppy disks 1600 (FINE), 1024 (FINE), or “Memory Stick”s 640 (FINE). The resized image is recorded, After “COMPLETE” appears in step 5, then the display returns to the select [CONTINUE] and repeat step 5 image display before resizing. above. To cancel changing the size Select [CANCEL] in step 3. 67 68 In INDEX mode Notes5 When you select [ALL]* • You cannot copy uncompressed images. Copying all the Select [OK]. • You cannot copy the image that is bigger information on your ∗ [ALL] can be selected only when than 1.4 MB. selecting [FD t FD] or [FD t • You cannot copy the images that the total floppy disk (DISK 2 MS]. amount of the images is bigger than COPY) 1 1.4 MB. If “NOT ENOUGH MEMORY”When you select [SELECT]** appears or flashes on the INDEX You can copy to another disk not only 6 Select all the images to be copied screen, cancel some images to copy and try the images you have recorded withwith the control button. The again. your camera but also various files you mark appears on the selected • If you eject and insert the floppy disk or 3, 4, 5 have created in other software withimages and then select [ENTER]. “Memory Stick” without selecting [EXIT] after “COMPLETE” appears, the image your computer. ∗∗ When selecting [MS t FD], the will be copied. 1 Select the media using the necessary number of floppy disks • The number of floppy disks that is needed Notes MS/FD selector. appears after selecting [ENTER]. for copying is as a guide, which is • Once you carry out DISK COPY, all Select [OK] again. displayed when selecting [MS FD]. information saved on the recipient floppyt 2 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE disk is erased to be replaced by newly selector to PLAY, then 6 Insert or change the floppy written data including the protected image display the INDEX screen. disk or “Memory Stick” data. Check the contents of the recipient following the messages on disk before copying the disk. • Be sure to use the floppy disk that has been 3 Select [TOOL], and then the LCD screen or on the [COPY] from the menu. finder. formatted by this camera to carry out “RECORDING” appears. When DISK COPY (page 72). 4 Select the media that the copying is completed, image will be copied onto. “COMPLETE” appears. • When the MS/FD selector is set To end copying, select [EXIT]. to FD. 1, 4 FD t FD: Copies to the floppy To continue copying the 3 disk FD MS: image to other floppy disks t Copies to the or “Memory Stick”s 2 “Memory Stick” After “COMPLETE” appears in step 6, • When the MS/FD selector is set select [CONTINUE] and repeat step 6. to MS. 1 Set the MS/FD selector to FD, MS t MS: then insert the floppy disk toCopies to the When selecting [MS t FD], if the be copied. “Memory Stick” amount of total images that will be MS t FD: Copies to the floppy copied is too large to copy to one Select [FILE], [DISK TOOL], disk floppy disk, the images will be copied 2 [DISK COPY], and then [OK] using multiple floppy disks. from the menu. “DISK ACCESS” appears. To cancel copying partway When “CHANGE FLOPPY Select [CANCEL]. 3 DISK” is displayed, eject the floppy disk. “INSERT FLOPPY DISK” appears. 69 70 1-17 BBBB Editing B Editing, 4 Insert another floppy disk. Selecting still images 4 Select [ENTER]. Format “RECORDING” appears. When copying is completed, to print (PRINT MARK) The marks on the selected images change from green to When you format a floppy disk or “COMPLETE” appears. You can mark a print mark on still white. “Memory Stick,” all data stored on the To end copying, select [EXIT]. images recorded with your camera. floppy disk or “Memory Stick” will be This mark is convenient when you deleted. Check the contents of the have images printed at a shop that floppy disk or “Memory Stick” before To continue copying to other conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print formatting. floppy disks Order Format) standard. After “COMPLETE” appears in step 4, 0001- 0006/ 0100PRINT MARK ENTER CANCEL Note SELECT OK select [CONTINUE] and repeat steps 3 Even if images are protected, these images and 4 above. will be deleted. To cancel copying partway 1 To unmark selected print marks Select [CANCEL]. Select the images to be unmarked in 1 Note 2, 3, 4 step 3 with the control button, then If you eject and insert the floppy disk select [ENTER]. 2 without selecting [EXIT] after “COMPLETE” appears, DISK COPY will In single mode To unmark all the print 3 be carried out onto the floppy disk. marks 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE Select [FILE], [PRINT MARK], selector to PLAY and display the image you want to print. [ALL], and then [OFF] from the menu. 1 Select the floppy disk or “Memory Stick” using the The marks on all images are MS/FD selector. 2 Select [FILE], [PRINT MARK], unmarked. and then [ON] from the menu. 2 Insert only the floppy disk or The (print) mark is marked on To print out using the FVP-1 “Memory Stick” you want to the displayed image. Mavica Printer format. Set PRESET SELECT SW to PC on Be sure to insert only the media the printer. you want to format. To unmark the print mark Notes 3 Select [FILE] from the menu.Select [OFF] in step 2. • You cannot mark moving images, Clip • When formatting a floppy disk Motion images or images recorded in Select [DISK TOOL], In INDEX mode TEXT mode. [FORMAT], and then [OK] from • If you mark an image recorded in TIFF the menu. 1 mode with a print mark, only theSet the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE uncompressed image is printed, and the • When formatting a “Memory selector to PLAY, then JPEG image recorded at the same time is Stick” display the INDEX screen. not printed. Select [FORMAT], and then [OK] from the menu. 2 Select [FILE], [PRINT MARK], and then [SELECT] from the menu. To cancel formatting 3 Select the images to be Select [CANCEL] in step 3. marked with the control button. 71 72 Notes B As an external drive Additional information • Avoid getting liquids on the floppy • Format the floppy disk or “Memory disk. Stick” only using this camera. You Using the camera as Precautions • Be sure to use a floppy disk case tocannot format the floppy disk or “Memory Stick” using a computer an external drive of a ensure protection of important data. via the USB cable. • Even when you use a 3.5 inch 2HDcomputer On cleaning • When you format, be sure to use a fully floppy disk, image data may not be charged battery pack or the AC power recorded and/or displayed dependingOnce you connect the camera to a Cleaning the LCD screen or finder adaptor as the power source. on the using environment. In thiscomputer using the USB cable, you Wipe the screen surface with a case, use a disk of other brand. can use the camera as a floppy disk/ cleaning cloth (not supplied) or an “Memory Stick” drive of a computer. LCD cleaning kit (not supplied) to Install the USB driver to the computer remove fingerprints, dust, etc. On operating temperature beforehand (page 31). Cleaning the camera surface Your camera is designed for use For Windows 98, Windows Clean the camera surface with a soft between the temperatures of 0°C to 98SE, Windows Me, and cloth slightly moistened with water, 40°C (32°F to 104°F). Recording in Windows 2000 Professional then wipe the surface dry. Do not use extremely cold or hot places that Users any type of solvent such as thinner, exceed this range is not recommended. alcohol or benzene as this may damage 1 Connect the camera to the the finish or the casing. computer using the supplied On moisture condensationAfter using your camera at the USB cable. seashore or other dusty locations If the camera is brought directly from a Clean your camera carefully. 2 cold to a warm location, or is placed inSelect the drive type using Otherwise, the salty air may corrode the MS/FD selector on this a very damp room, moisture may camera. the metal fittings or dust may enter the condense inside or outside the camera. When used as the floppy disk inside of your camera, causing a Should this occur, the camera will not drive, set the MS/FD selector to malfunction. operate properly. FD. Moisture condensation occurs When used as the “Memory Stick” On floppy disks easily when: drive, set the MS/FD selector to • The camera is brought from a cold MS. To protect data recorded on floppy location such as a ski slope into a disks, note the following: warmly heated room. 3 Connect the AC power • Avoid storing floppy disks near • The camera is taken from an air- adaptor and turn on the magnets or magnetic fields such as camera. conditioned room or car interior tothose of speakers and televisions. the hot outdoors, etc. Otherwise, permanent erasure of disk 4 Open “My Computer” on data may result. How to prevent moisture Windows and check the icon condensation “Removable Disk,” then use • Avoid storing floppy disks in areas the camera as an external subject to direct sunlight or sources When bringing the camera from a cold drive. of high temperature, such as a place to a warm place, seal the camera heating device. Floppy disk warping in a plastic bag and allow it to adapt to or damage may result, rendering the conditions at the new location over a Note disk useless. period of time (about an hour). When using Windows Me or Windows 2000 • Avoid contact with the disk’s surface Professional, see also page 34. by opening the disk shutter plate. If the disk’s surface becomes blemished, data may be rendered unreadable. 73 74 1-18 BBBB Editing BBBB As an external drive, If moisture condensation occurs Immediately eject the floppy disk, then On battery pack Charging the built-in rechargeable Notes lithium battery: • Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while turn off the camera and wait about an • Use only the specified charger with • Connect your camera to house reading or writing data. hour for the moisture to evaporate. the charging function. current (mains) using the AC power • Data may be damaged if: Note that if you attempt to record with adaptor supplied with your camera, —you remove the “Memory Stick” or turn• To prevent accident from a short moisture remaining inside the lens, you circuit, do not allow metal objects to and leave your camera with the off your camera while reading or writing will be unable to record clear images. come into contact with the battery power turned off for more than 24 data. —you use the “Memory Stick” in a terminals. hours. location subject to the effects of static On AC power adaptor • Keep the battery pack away from fire. • Or install the fully charged battery electricity or noise. • Never expose the battery pack to pack in your camera, and leave your • Do not attach any other material than the • Unplug the unit from the wall outlet temperatures above 60°C (140°F), camera with the power turned off for supplied label on the labeling position. (mains) when you are not using the such as in a car parked in the sun or more than 24 hours. • When you carry or store the “Memory Stick,” put it in its supplied case. unit for a long time. To disconnect under direct sunlight. If any problem occurs, unplug your • Do not touch the terminals of a “Memorythe power cord (mains lead), pull it • Keep the battery pack dry. Stick” with your hand or a metal object. out by the plug. Never pull the power • camera and contact your nearest SonyDo not expose the battery pack to any • Do not strike, bend or drop the “Memory cord (mains lead) itself. dealer.mechanical shock. Stick.” • Do not operate the unit with a • Do not disassemble or modify the• Do not disassemble nor modify the damaged cord (mains lead) or if the “Memory Stick.”battery pack. unit has been dropped or damaged. • Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get• Attach the battery pack to the camera • On “ Memory Sticks ” wet.Do not bend the power cord (mains securely. “Memory Stick”, , “MagicGate lead) forcibly, or place a heavy object • Charging while some capacity “Memory Stick” is a new compact, Memory Stick” and are on it. This will damage the cord remains does not affect the original portable and versatile IC recording trademarks of Sony Corporation. (mains lead) and may cause fire or battery capacity. medium with a data capacity that “MagicGate” and are electrical shock. exceeds a floppy disk. “Memory Stick” trademarks of Sony Corporation. • Prevent metallic objects from coming is specially designed for exchanging into contact with the metal parts of On the built-in rechargeable and sharing digital data among the connecting section. If this lithium battery “Memory Stick” compatible products. happens, a short may occur and the Because it is removable, “Memory Using your camera unit may be damaged. Your camera is supplied with a built-in rechargeable lithium battery installed Stick” can also be used for external abroad• Always keep metal contacts clean. so as to retain the date and time, etc., data storage. • Do not disassemble the unit. Power sourcesregardless of the setting of the POWER • Do not apply mechanical shock or switch. The built-in rechargeable There are two types of “Memory You can use your camera in any drop the unit. lithium battery is always charged as Sticks”: general “Memory Sticks” and country or area with the supplied • While the unit is in use, particularly long as you are using your camera. The “MagicGate Memory Sticks” that are battery charger within 100 V to 240 during charging, keep it away from battery, however, will get discharged equipped with the MagicGate* VAC, 50/60 Hz. Use a commercially AM receivers and video equipment. copyright protection technology. available AC plug adaptor [a], ifgradually if you do not use your AM receivers and video equipment You can use both types of “Memory necessary, depending on the design ofcamera. It will be completely disturb AM reception and video the wall outlet (mains) [b].discharged in about six months if you Stick” with your camera. However, operation. do not use your camera at all. Even if because your camera does not support • The unit becomes warm during use. the built-in rechargeable lithium the MagicGate standards, data recorded with your camera is not AC-L10A/L10B/L10CThis is not a malfunction. battery is not charged, it will not affect • Do not place the unit in locations that the camera operation. To retain the subject to MagicGate copyright are: date and time, etc., charge the battery if protection. — Extremely hot or cold the battery is discharged. ∗ MagicGate is copyright protection technology that uses encryption — Dusty or dirty technology. — Very humid — Vibrating 75 76 Watching the playback picture on Effective use of the battery pack • The E mark indicating there is little TV About “ InfoLITHIUM” • Battery performance decreases in remaining battery time sometimes If you want to view the playback battery pack low-temperature surroundings. So, flashes depending on the operating picture on a TV, you need a TV having the time that the battery pack can be conditions or ambient temperature a video input jack and a video What is the “InfoLITHIUM” battery used is shorter in cold places. We and environment even if the connecting cable. pack? recommend the following to use the remaining battery time is 5 to 10 The color system of the TV must be The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack is a battery pack longer: minutes. the same as that of your digital still lithium-ion battery pack that has — Put the battery pack in a pocket camera. Check the following list: functions for communicating close to your body to warm it up, How to store the battery pack information related to operating and insert it in your camera • Even if the battery pack is not usedNTSC system conditions between your camera and immediately before you start for a long time, store it in a dry, coolBahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, the AC power adaptor. taking shots. place after fully charging it once perCentral America, Chile, Columbia, The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack year and then using the battery pack Ecuador, Jamaica, Japan, Korea, — Use the large capacity batterycalculates the power consumption up on your camera. This is to Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the pack (NP-F550, optional).according to the operating conditions maintain the battery pack’s functions. Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela, etc. • Frequently using the LCD panel orof your camera, and displays the • To use the battery pack up on yourfrequently operating the zoom wears PAL system remaining battery time in minutes. camera, leave the POWER switch toout the battery pack faster. We Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, on in PLAY mode until the powerCharging the battery pack recommend using the large capacity Denmark, Finland, Germany, Great goes off without a floppy disk or a• Be sure to charge the battery pack battery pack (NP-F550, optional). Britain, Holland, Italy, Kuwait, “Memory Stick” inserted.before you start using your camera. • Be certain to turn the POWER switch Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway, to off when not taking shots or Battery life Portugal, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, • We recommend charging the battery playing back on your camera. • The battery life is limited. Battery Switzerland, Thailand, etc. pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F) • We recommend have spare batteries capacity decreases little by little as PAL-M system until the POWER ON/OFF (CHG) handy for two or three times the you use it more and more, and as Brazil lamp goes out, indicating that the expected shooting time, and make a time passes. When the battery battery pack is fully charged. If you trial shots before taking the actual operating time is shortened PAL-N system charge the battery pack outside of shots. considerably, a probable cause is that Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay this temperature range, you may not • Do not expose the battery pack to the battery pack has reached the end SECAM system be able to efficiently charge the water. The battery pack is not water- of its life. Please buy a new battery pack. Bulgaria, Czech Republic, France, battery pack. resistant. Guiana, Hungary, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, • After charging is completed, either • The battery life varies according toRemaining battery time indicator Poland, Russia, Slovak Republic, disconnect the AC power adaptor how it is stored and operating• If the power goes off although the Ukraine, etc. from the DC IN jack on your camera conditions and environment for eachbattery remaining indicator indicates or remove the battery pack. battery pack.that the battery pack has enough power to operate, charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication on the battery remaining indicator is correct. Note, however, that the correct battery indication sometimes will not be restored if it is used in high temperatures for a long time or left in a fully charged state, or the battery pack is frequently used. Regard the remaining battery time indication as the approximate shooting time. 77 78 1-19 Additional information Additional information,

Troubleshooting Symptom Cause and/or Solution

You cannot display a print • You cannot display print marks on moving images, If you experience trouble with your camera, first check the following items. Should mark. text images and Clip Motion images. your camera still not operate properly after you have made these checks, consult your The picture is noisy. • Your camera is placed near a TV or other Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If code displays (C:ss:ss) equipment that uses strong magnets. appear on the LCD screen or on the finder, the self-diagnosis display function is working (page 87). tMove your camera away from the TV, etc. The picture is too dark. • You are shooting a subject with a light source behind the subject. Symptom Cause and/or Solution tAdjust the exposure (page 58). Your camera does not • You are not using an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. • The brightness of the LCD screen is too low. work. tUse an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (page 9). tAdjust the brightness of the LCD screen • The floppy disk is not inserted properly. (page 20). tEject the disk, and insert it again (page 16). The flash does not work. • The flash is set to . • The battery level is too low. (The indicator tSet the flash to (no indication), , or appears.) (page 23). tCharge the battery pack fully (page 10). • The camera is in one of the following PROGRAM • The AC power adaptor is not connected securely. AE modes: Twilight, Twilight plus, or Landscape. tConnect it securely to the DC IN jack and a wall tCancel the PROGRAM AE function or set the outlet (mains) (page 10, 13). flash to (page 23, 56). • The malfunction occurs inside the camera. • The PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector is set to tTurn off the power, and turn on after one MOVIE. minute, then check that the camera works tSet it to STILL. properly. • The flash is not popped up. Your camera cannot • The PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector is set to PLAY. tPop up the flash (page 23). record images. tSet it to STILL or MOVIE (pages 18, 25). The date and time are • The date and time are not set correctly. • No floppy disk is inserted into your camera. recorded incorrectly. tSet the correct date and time (page 14). tInsert a floppy disk (page 16). Vertical streaks appear • This is called the smear phenomenon. • The tab on the disk is set to the unrecordable when you are shooting a tThis is not a malfunction. position. very bright subject. tSet it to the recording position (page 16). The zoom does not work. • PROGRAM AE is set to the Panfocus mode. • No “Memory Stick” is inserted into your camera. tCancel the Panfocus mode (page 56). tInsert a “Memory Stick” (page 17). • The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is Digital zoom does not • You cannot use digital zoom when recordingfunction. set to LOCK. moving pictures. Set it to the recording position. • Digital zoom is set to [OFF].t tSet digital zoom to [ON] at the menu. The picture is out of focus. • Your camera is not in macro recording mode when you shoot a subject that is about 3 to 25 cm The image is in • You shot the image in TEXT mode. (1 3/16 to 9 7/8 inches) away from the lens. monochrome. tCancel the TEXT mode (page 52). tSet the macro recording mode (page 54). • The picture effect is set to B&W. Move the zoom lever to the W side. tCancel the B&W mode (page 60).t The resizing function does • You cannot resize moving images, text images, Clip The image cannot be tConsult the computer or software manufacturer. not work. Motion images, and uncompressed images. played back on a computer. 79 80 Symptom Cause and/or Solution Symptom Cause and/or Solution The image and sound • You are playing back the file from the floppy disk Your computer does not • The battery level is low. break off when you play or “Memory Stick.” recognize your camera. tUse the AC power adaptor (page 13). back an image on a tCopy the file to the hard disk of the computer • The camera is turned off. computer. and then play back the file from the hard disk tTurn on the camera. (pages 29, 34). • The USB cable is not connected firmly. Your camera cannot delete • The image is protected. tDisconnect the USB cable, and connect it again an image. tCancel the protection (page 65). firmly. Make sure that “USB MODE” is displayed on the LCD screen or on the finder The power turns off • With the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector set to suddenly. (page 31).STILL or MOVIE, if you do not operate the camera for about three minutes while the power is on, the • The USB connectors on your computer are camera turns off automatically to prevent wearing connected to other equipment besides the keyboard, down the battery pack. the mouse, and your camera. Turn on the camera. tDisconnect the USB cables except for the onest connected to the keyboard, the mouse, and your • The battery pack is discharged. camera. tReplace it with a fully charged battery pack. • The position of the MS/FD selector is not set to the The image does not • The VIDEO OUT setting of your camera is proper position for the media being used. appear on the TV screen. incorrect. tSet the MS/FD selector to the proper position. tChange the setting (page 47). • The USB driver is not installed. The slide show function • The slide show function stops after about tInstall the USB driver (page 31). stops automatically. 20 minutes when using a floppy disk. • For Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows tTo continue the slide show, select [START] Me and Windows 2000 Professional users again (page 63). Since the camera is connected to a computer with the USB cable before installing the USB driver, the You cannot use the • The camera is set to TEXT mode. drive is not recognized properly by the computer. PROGRAM AE function. tCancel the TEXT mode (page 52). tDelete the drive which is not recognized The macro function does • The camera is in manual focus mode. properly, then install the USB driver. For details, not work. tSet it to auto focus mode (page 55). see the procedure below. • PROGRAM AE is set to the Panfocus mode. tCancel the Panfocus mode (page 56). Reinstall the USB driver when using Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me and Windows 2000 Professional 1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load. 2 Connect the USB jack on the camera and the computer with the supplied USB cable. 3 Insert a media and set the MS/FD selector to the appropriate position according to the media inserted. 4 Connect the AC power adaptor to your camera and then to a wall outlet (mains), and turn on the power of your camera. 81 82 1-20 Additional information Additional information, 5 Open “Device Manager” on Windows. Symptom Cause and/or Solution For Windows 98, Windows 98SE and Windows Me users: The indication of the • You are using the camera for many hours under 1 Open [Control Panel] from [ My Computer], then double-click [System]. battery remaining time is extremely hot or cold temperatures. not proper, or the power is • The battery pack is dead. 2 System properties is displayed. Click the [Device Manager] tab located at the immediately turned off tReplace the battery pack with a new one top. even if the battery (page 9). remaining indicator 3 Click [ SonyDSC] in [ Other devices], then click the [Delete (E)] indicates that the battery • The battery level is too low. button located at the lower-right corner. level is sufficient. tInstall the fully charged battery pack (page 9, 10). For Windows 2000 Professional users: • A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery * Log in with the permission of administrator. time. 1 Open [Control Panel] from [ My Computer], then double-click [System]. tCharge the battery pack fully (page 10). The POWER ON/OFF • A malfunction has occurred in the battery pack. 2 System properties is displayed. Click the [Hardware] tab located at the top, (CHG) lamp flashes when tContact your Sony dealer or local authorized then click the [Device Manager (D)] button. charging a battery pack. Sony service facility. 3 Click [View] in [Device Manager], then click [Devices by type (E)]. The POWER ON/OFF • The AC power adaptor is not connected. (CHG) lamp does not light tConnect the power cord firmly to a wall outlet 4 Right-click [ SonyDSC] in [ Other devices], then click [Delete (E)]. up when charging a (mains) (page 10). battery pack. 6 After the message appears to verify that you delete the device • The battery pack is not installed properly. manager, click the [OK] button. tInstall it properly (page 9). • Charging of the battery pack is complete. 7 Turn off the camera, disconnect the USB cable, and restart the computer. 8 Install the USB driver in the supplied CD-ROM to the computer following the procedure on page 31. Perform all steps without skipping. Battery packs Symptom Cause and/or Solution The battery pack cannot • The power of the camera is turned on. be charged. tTurn off the power of the camera (page 10). The battery life is short. • You are recording/playing back images under extremely cold temperatures. • The battery pack is not charged enough. tCharge the battery pack fully. • The battery pack is dead. tReplace the battery pack with a new one. 83 84

Warning and notice messages Message Meaning

INVALID OPERATION You are playing back a file that was Various messages appear on the LCD screen or on the finder. Check the created on equipment other than your corresponding descriptions in the following list. camera. for “InfoLITHIUM” battery only The battery is not the “InfoLITHIUM” type. Message Meaning - The image is protected. DRIVE ERROR There is trouble with the disk drive. The battery level is too low. When the SYSTEM ERROR Turn the power off and on again. remaining time is about 5 to 10 minutes, NO DISK No disk is inserted. E may flash depending on the battery pack used, operating conditions, or the NO MEMORY STICK No “Memory Stick” is inserted. environment. FORMAT ERROR • The floppy disk loaded is not MS-DOS formatted (512 bytes×18 sectors). • Failed to format the “Memory Stick.” • The Floppy Disk Adaptor for Memory Stick is inserted. MEMORY STICK ERROR The inserted “Memory Stick” cannot be used with your camera, or the “Memory Stick” is damaged or not inserted correctly. DISK PROTECT The tab on the disk is set to the unrecordable position. MEMORY STICK LOCKED The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to the LOCK position. DISK FULL The disk is full. NO MEMORY SPACE The capacity of the “Memory Stick” is not sufficient to record images. NO FILE No image is recorded on the disk. FILE ERROR Trouble has occurred during playback. FILE PROTECT The image is protected. DISK ERROR A 2DD floppy disk is inserted, or there is trouble with the disk. DIRECTORY ERROR A directory with the same name already exists. NOT ENOUGH MEMORY The remaining capacity of the floppy disk or “Memory Stick” is not enough to copy the image. IMAGE SIZE OVER You tried to play back images with an image size larger than the maximum playback size of this camera. 85 86 1-21 Additional information Additional information,

Self-diagnosis display LCD screen/finder indicators

Your camera has a self-diagnosis display. This function displays the camera condition on the The indicators during recording LCD screen or on the finder with a combination of a letter and four digits of numbers. If this appears, check the following code chart. The code 1 informs you of the camera’s current condition. 2 qs The last two digits (indicated by ss) will differ 3 qd depending on the state of the camera. 4 qf Self-diagnosis display 5 qg • C: ss: ss 6 120min 1600 ECM 10 qhREC 0:03 You can repair the camera 7 +1.0EV 15s qj

DATE

yourself. 8 SOLARIZE qk • E: ss: ss Contact your Sony dealer or local 9 ql authorized Sony service facility. 0 F2.8500 w; qa EFFECT FILE CAMERA SETUPSELECT OK MENU BAR OFF wa Code Cause and/or Corrective Action C:32:ss • There is trouble with the disk drive. A Sharpness indicator P Remaining disk capacity/ Turn the power off and on again. Remaining memory capacityt B Focus mode indicator/Macro indicator C:13:ss • An unformatted floppy disk or indicator : Floppy disk “Memory Stick” is inserted. C Battery remaining indicator Format the floppy disk or “Memory : “Memory Stick”t Stick.” (page 72) D Flash level indicator/Flash Q Recording time indicator • A floppy disk or “Memory Stick” not mode indicator compatible with this camera is inserted. R Self-diagnosis functionE PROGRAM AE indicator/Zoom indicator/Recording time tChange the floppy disk or “Memory indicator indicator Stick.” (pages 16, 17) F White balance indicator E:61:ss • A camera malfunction that you cannot S Self-timer indicator E:91:ss repair has occurred. G SteadyShot indicator T Spot light-metering indicator tContact your Sony dealer or local H Picture effect indicator authorized Sony service facility and U Menu bar and guide menu inform them of the 5-digit I DATE indicator They appear by pressing v on the indication. (example: E:61:10) control button and disappear by J EV level indicator pressing V. If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times when C: : is indicated, contact your Sony dealer or local K Iris/Shutter speed indicatorss ss authorized Sony service facility. L AE lock indicator/Focus lock indicator M Recording mode/Clip Motion indicator N Image size indicator O Number of recorded images 87 89 The indicators during still image playback 120min 1600 11/122637485MVC-011F 20017412:00AM9AProtect indicator/Zoom scaling : Floppy disk indicator : “Memory Stick” B Print mark indicator G Number of stored images onaCRecording mode/Clip Motion floppy disk or “Memory Stick” indicator H Image number D Image size indicator I Recording date of the playback E File name* image* F Remaining disk capacity/Remaining ∗ When the menu bar is displayed, this memory capacity indicator indicator disappears from the screen. The indicators during moving image playback 120min 160 6/8 0:1065INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF A Moving image file indicator G Counter B Image size indicator H Image number/number of Playback button/pause button stored images on a floppy diskC or “Memory Stick” B is displayed during stop, and X during playback. I Playback image D Image searching buttons J Playback bar E Menu bar and guide menu F Remaining disk capacity/Remaining memory capacity indicator : Floppy disk : “Memory Stick” 11-2-22 E Additional information Additional information,

MVC-FD97 SECTION 2 DISASSEMBLY

• This set can be disassembled in the order shown below. MVC-FD97 2-1. TOP CABINET BLOCK 2-2. EVF BLOCK ASSEMBLY 2-3. VF LENS ASSEMBLY 2-4. VF-143 BOARD ASSEMBLY (Page 2-2) (Page 2-2) (Page 2-2) (Page 2-2) 2-5. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK SERVICE POSITION (EVF) ASSEMBLY (Page 2-3) (Page 2-3) 2-6. PK-55 BOARD 2-8. FDD BLOCK ASSEMBLY (Page 2-3) (Page 2-5) 2-7. LCD MODULE 2-9. FU-153 BOARD 2-14. FC-85 BOARD 2-15. CF-83 BOARD (Page 2-4) (Page 2-5) (Page 2-7) (Page 2-7) SERVICE POSITION 2-10. LENS COMPLETE BLOCK (PK-55 BOARD AND LCD PANEL) ASSEMBLY (Page 2-5) (Page 2-4) 2-11. CABINET VP BLOCK ASSEMBLY (Page 2-5) 2-12. VP-55 BOARD (Page 2-6) 2-13. LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY (Page 2-6) SERVICE POSITION SERVICE POSITION (CD-311 AND VP-55 BOARDS) (FC-85 BOARD) (Page 2-6) (Page 2-7) 2-1, Note: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given. 2-1. TOP CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY 2-3. VF LENS ASSEMBLY 3 Screw 2 Screw7 Top cabinet (M2) (M2) block assembly 4 Screw (M2) 2 VF cabinet assembly 4 VF lens assembly 3 Flexible board (CN501) 9 Harness 8 Flexible board (CN301) (CN802) 0 Flexible board (CN301) 1 Screw 6 Clow (M2) 1 Two screws (M2) 5 Screw (M2) 2-4. VF-143 BOARD 2-2. EVF BLOCK ASSEMBLY 1 Flexible board (CN802) 8 Clow 1 Two plate screws 5 EVF block assembly (M2) 6 Clow 3 Screw 2 Accessory shoe (M2) 9 VF-143 board 5 Two LCD cushions 7 Two clows 4 BL illuminator 2 Two clows 3 Clow 4 Screw (M2) 2-2, [SERVICE POSITION (EVF)] VF-143 board : Contacting surface VF lens assembly AC power AC IN adaptor Base Adjustment remote commander CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A) 2-5. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY 2-6. PK-55 BOARD 2 Flexible board (CN781) 5 Cabinet (rear) 3 Screw block assembly (M2) 1 Two screws (M2) 4 Screw 1 Harness (M2) (CN702) 7 Six screws 2 Two screws (M2) 3 Flexible board 6 Flexible board (CN901) (CN802) 6 Flexible board (CN851) 8 PK-55 board5Zshield case assembly 4 Screw 2-3, 2-7. LCD MODULE 4 Speaker 6 LCD module 1 Two screws 5 Cold cathode fluorescent tube 2 Two screws 3 BL fixed plate [SERVICE POSITION (PK-55 BOARD AND LCD PANEL)] : Contacting surface LCD panel Cold cathode Insulating sheet fluorescent tube AC power adaptor AC IN Cabinet (front) block assembly FC-85 board Base PK-55 board Adjustment remote commander Base CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A) 2-4, 2-8. FDD BLOCK ASSEMBLY 2-10. LENS COMPLETE BLOCK ASSEMBLY 4 FDD block assembly 5 Harness (CN004) 2 Two flexible board 1 Four screws (CN182, 401) (M2) 1 Harness (CN003) 2 Remove the lens complete assembly in the direction of the arrow. 3 Two flexible board (CN101, 183) 2-9. FU-153 BOARD 2-11. CABINET VP BLOCK ASSEMBLY 1 Harness 5 Flexible board (CN002) (MF block) 4 FU-153 board 1 Screw (M2) 2 Harness (CN001) 3 Two clows 3 Screw (M2) 4 Cabinet VP block assembly 2 Screw (M2) 2-5, 2-12. VP-55 BOARD 2-13. LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY Screw 1 Screw2 4 Clow (M2) (M2) 2 Boss 6 Cabinet (LT) 3 Boss qs Screw (M2) 5 Clow qa VP fixed plate qd Screw (M2) 1 Two screws 4 Lens block assembly qf VP-55 board 3 Screw (M2) 8 Flexible board 7 Two flexible board (CN232) (CN231, 235) 0 Screw (M2) 9 Screw (M2) [SERVICE POSITION (CD-311 AND VP-55 BOARDS)] : Contacting surface Cabinet (LB) assembly AC power FU-153 board AC IN CPC-12 jigadaptor (J-6082-436-A) Cabinet (front) block assembly FC-85 board CD-311 board VP-55 board Adjustment remote Lens block assembly commander PK-55 board Cabinet (rear) block assembly Base Base Cabinet (VP) assembly 2-6, 2-14. FC-85 BOARD 2-15. CF-83 BOARD 7 FC-85 board 5 Four screws 1 Screw (M2) (M2) 3 CF-83 board 6 Claw Two switches (S402, 403) Two SS knobs 2 Two claws 4 Three flexible 2 Screw boards (M2) (CN701, 702, 703) 1 Flexible board Note: When installing CF-83 board, connect two switches 3 USB connector (CN682) (S402, 403) with two SS knobs. [SERVICE POSITION (FC-85 BOARD)] : Contacting surface AC power AC IN adaptor Cabinet (LB) assembly Cabinet (rear) block assembly CF-83 board FU-153 board FC-85 board VP-55 board Lens block assembly CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A) Top cabinet Cabinet (VP) assembly block assembly

FDD

Adjustment remote commander 2-7, 2-16. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION VF-143 FLASH UNIT ( LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT) MA-404 (MIC AMP) FU-153 (DC IN) AE-25 (CONTROL SWITCH) FC-85 ( CAMERA PROCESS, CAMERA DSP, VIDEO, MEMORY, LENS DRIVE, SH DSP, USB I/F, MS SOCKET, FDD INTERFACE, FDD CONTROL,) HI CONTROL, AUDIO, DC/DC CONVERTER CD-311 (CCD IMAGER, STEADY SHOT SENSOR) CF-83 (CONTROL SWITCH) PK-54 ( MODE SWITCH, A/V OUT, LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR,) BACK LIGHT DRIVE VP-55 (STEDY SHOT CONTROL) 2-8, 2-17. FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION Control switch block FP-171 FP-174 FP-176 LCD901 FP-168 FP-335 ND801 Lens assembly FP-175 VAP assembly FP-173 FP-177 LCD902 FP-166 FP-172 FP-169 FP-170 2-9 E,

MVC-FD97 SECTION 3 BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM

CD-311 BOARD (1/2) FC-85 BOARD

LENS IRIS FILTER METER IC101 IC102 IC702 IC704

ND CCD IMAGER CCD OUT S/H, AGC, DATA BUS 12 FDD REC/PB AMP, FLOPPY

(SEE PAGE 4-8) A/D CONV. IC301 16 16

CONTROL

(SEE PAGE 4-15) CAMERA FDD DATA STEPPING FDD DATA DISK DSP 14 3 (SEE PAGE 4-30) MOTOR DRIVE DRIVE UNIT (SEE PAGE 4-18) (SEE PAGE 4-27) VAP UNITMMMMHM16 H1, H2 IC505 MC XRDIC101 V1A, V1B, V2, V3A, 16M MC XWE1TIMING V3B, V4, VSUB CNT FLASH ROMGENERATOR 20(SEE PAGE 4-25) PK-55 BOARD (1/3)VAP LOCK FOCUS ZOOM SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR (SEE PAGE 4-15) IC501 IC702 MC CAM, IC182 SHOCK DETECT 16 16 SH DSP(SEE PAGE 4-23) (SEE PAGE 4-47)DRIVE + IRIS MSHUT ON IC506 (MECHA SHUTTER) 64M SDRAM DRIVE (SEE PAGE 4-25) (SEE PAGE 4-22) 12 20 CN681 MS DIO, MS BS, MS SCLK MS ND DRIVE– IC181 ND ON SOCKET ND FILTER DRIVE (SEE PAGE 4-21) IC302 IC508 CN201 16 DATA BUS 16 64M SDRAM EEPROM(SEE PAGE 4-25) FP-335 FLEXIBLE USBIC186 (SEE PAGE 4-20) IC184, 185 IC681 BOARD DRIVE– EVR 14ADDRESS BUS14 D+ USB D+ (SEE PAGE 4-21, 22) (D/A CONVERTER) PE DAC LEVEL 1, 2 USB DATA USB I/F IRIS DRIVE (SEE PAGE 4-22) CNTC (SEE PAGE 4-26) D– USB D– HALL+ HALL AD SP VOL HALL AMP (SEE PAGE 4-26) Z SENS RST Z SENS RST PK-55 BOARD (2/3) F SENS RST F SENS RST (SEE PAGE 4-47, 48) J781HALL AD V OUT ON IC901 AV OUT Y OUT Y OUT VIDEO OUT IC183 VIDEO AMP PE EN1, C OUT C OUT ZOOM MOTOR (SEE PAGE 4-19) AUDIO OUT(SEE PAGE 4-21) PE DIR1A, PE DIR1B

DRIVE

PE EN0, FOCUS MOTOR PE DIR1A, PE DIR0B AU SDTI IC252 A OUT L SP+, SP– SP901 DRIVE AUDIO AD/DA SPEAKERIC253 AU SDTO CONVERETER(SEE PAGE 4-33) A IN L AUDIO AMP VAP LOCK SENS (SEE PAGE 4-33) SP VOL MA-404 BOARD (2/2) BEEP IN MIC901 IC203 VAP LOCK ON PANEL/EVF Y IC301 MICROPHONE VAP LOCK VAP LOCK ON PANEL/EVF R-Y VAP LOCK SENS PANEL/EVF B-Y MIC AMP MOTOR DRIVE STRB ON (SEE PAGE 4-62) (SEE PAGE 4-41) Y DRIVE A, B IC201, 202 STRB AIN EXT STRB ONIC205 P DRIVE A, B PITCH, YAW IC209AMP DRIVE STEADY SHOT(SEE PAGE 4-41) (SEE PAGE 4-41) CONTROL

VP-55 BOARD CAM SI, CAM SO, XCAM SCK

EVF Y VR (SEE PAGE 4-42) EVF R-Y IC502 VG LCD902 EVF B-Y LCD VB

CD-311 BOARD (1/2) CAM SI, CAM SO, XCAM SCK DRIVEBEEP IN

IC150 IC208 (SEE PAGE 4-57)

COLOR

SE150, 151 IC603 LCD PITCH/YAW PITCH/YAW A/D IC651 TG CLK

MONITOR

IC503 LCD TIMING SENSOR SENSOR AMP CONVERTER MC CLK HI SO, XHI SCK D/A GENERATOR(SEE PAGE 4-9) (SEE PAGE 4-42) X651 CLOCK GEN. USB CLK(SEE PAGE 4-26) CONVERTER (SEE PAGE 4-60) 48MHz AU CLK (EVR) (SEE PAGE 4-58) IC601 Q605 STB CHARGE STB CHARGE XSTB FULL XSTB FULL VF-143 BOARD (1/2) DC/AC CONVERTER SWITCHING ND601 FLASH (SEE PAGE 4-57) (SEE PAGE 4-59) UNIT STRB ON VF-143 BOARD (2/2) T601 STRB AIN IC404 D501, Q501CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK MA-404 BOARD EVF SENS EYE SENSOR (SEE PAGE 4-62) (1/2) HI VAP P 5V ZOOM ZOOM SW AD EVF LED ONCONTROL FDD P 5V SWITCH (SEE PAGE 4-32) PANEL Y VR FDD 4.9V PANEL R-Y IC901 VG LCD901 CAM 15V SHUTTER XRS ON1, XRS ON2 PANEL B-Y LCD VB SWITCH KEY AD1, KEY AD2, XCAM/PB,A 4.9V DRIVEMOVIE/XSTILL, XPWR IC001 FUNCTIONPANEL 13.2V (SEE PAGE 4-50)

COLOR

KEY IC904 LCD DC PANEL 4.9V AE-25 MONITOR CONTROL FUNCTION KEY AD4 LCD TIMINGPANEL –15.3V

FU-153 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-35) BOARD KEY HI SO, HI SI, XHI SCK GENERATORPANEL 6.5V

(SEE PAGE 4-64) (SEE PAGE 4-62) IC902 (SEE PAGE 4-51) (SEE PAGE 4-68) D 3.2V HI SO, XHI SCK D/A CAM 3.2V CF-83 IC406 CONVERTER + CAM P 5V BOARD FUNCTION KEY AD0, KEY AD3 EEPROM (EVR) D 1.8V KEY (SEE PAGE 4-32) (SEE PAGE 4-49) BL LEV Q856 BT901 BATT SIG (SEE PAGE 4-62) IC405 BL HIGHBATTERYSA3.2V BL UNREG SWITCHING ND801 TERMINAL CAM –7.5V TIMER – SYS DD ON RST SIO, RST SCK CLOCK BT701 T851 LCD DD ON IC851(SEE PAGE 4-32) LITHIUM BATTERY DC/DC CONTROL

INVERTER

(SEE PAGE 4-53) TRANSBATT SIG J001 EXT STRB ON SENS BL UNREG D401 LANC IN IC403 LANC SIG DC IN BATT ACCACV UNREG UNREG IC401 IC402 LANC OUT LANC IN/OUT LANC DC ST UNREG ACV +3.1V REG RESET (SEE PAGE 4-31) BATT UNREG UNREG D402 (SEE PAGE 4-31) (SEE PAGE 4-31) FP-176 FLEXIBLE

PK-55 BOARD (3/3) BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-48)

3-1 3-2 HALL AD SP VOL CAM SO, XCAM SCK CAM SO, XCAM SCK CAM SI, CAM SO, XCAM SCK ADDERESS BUS ADDERESS BUS DATA BUS DATA BUS HI SO, HI SI, XHI SCK,

MVC-FD97

3-12. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 1

FU-153 BOARD FC-85 BOARD (1/2) CN801 (2/2)

(SEE PAGE 4-68) J001 EVER 3.2V EVER 3.2V CN001 CN004 CN001 DC IN F003 ACV UNREG66BL UNREG BL UNREG BL UNREG 42 BATT/XEXT77413 F00122ST UNREG ST UNREG PANEL 13.2V 39 2 ACV GND33F002 PANEL –15.3V44VCC UNREG L001 VCC UNREG 37 TO55PANEL 6.5V A POWER BLOCK 3F005 36 (SEE PAGE 3-27)ACV UNREG ACV UNREG11PANEL 4.9V 40 F004 BATT UNREG A 4.9V8819 BATT UNREG PANEL 3.2V 20 Q001, 004 CN003 (1/2) CN002 (1/2) D401 D402 D 3.2V33FAST CHARGE ON Q004 18 VCC VCC OUT 45 SWITCHING L007 INIT CHARGE ON44BL UNREG Q002, 003 OUT A 46BT901 Q005 IC403 6 –INA Q009, 010, 014 ST UNREGBATTERY CN002 TERMINAL CHARGE Q404 +IN A 7LANC I/O FDD P 5VBATT CONTROL UNREG (SEE PAGE 4-31)+ SCPA8

EMERGENCY

1 DETECT BATT/EXT Q024, 03222BATT SIGS2BATT SIG IC401 IC001 Q036, 03811(SEE PAGE 4-31) DC CONTROL LCD DD ON 13.2V DC PACK SW DC PACK SW (SEE PAGE 4-35) REG4552+3.1V T001 BATT GND REG DC/DC CONV. D002 – 3 Q001 TRANS RECT L016 IC402 SWITCHING45CAM 15V

RESET

3 Q026, 029, 035(SEE PAGE 4-31) D003 D004 6 PANEL –15.3V

REG PK-55 BOARD (1/2) 2D410

(SEE PAGE 4-47) CN701 (1/2) CN801 (1/2) IC40518Q025, 028, BT701 1 50 BATT TIMER OUT B 44 Q031, 034 TO LITHIUM BATTERY CLOCK 11 –INB –15V –7.5V CAM –7.5V B POEWR BLOCK 2(SEE PAGE 4-32) REG (SEE PAGE 3-25) Q027, 030, 037 +IN B 12 IC404 SCP B 13 PANEL 6.5V

REG

HI CONTROL D001 (SEE PAGE 4-32) RECT 42 45 Q013, 016 PANELBACKUP 75 – 77 4.9VVCC L009 86 87 Q023 A 4.9V LCD DD ON SWITCH L015 XLANC ON 10 CAM P 5VQ003 SWITCHING L005 L012 4.9V FDD 4.9V OUT C 40 25 +INC Q018 BATT UNREG –IN C 26 71 BATT SENS SCP C 24 Q005 – 007 FAST CHARGE ON 100 FAST CHARGE D1.8V D 1.8V INIT CHARGE ON 27 INIT CHARGE REG L008 BATT/EXT D 3.2V 20 BATT/XEXT Q002 SWITCHING L004 Q409 3.2V L010 CAM 3.2V BATT SIG BATTERY 48 BATT SI L011CHARGE A 3.2V DETECTOR 49 BATT SO OUT D 39 DC PACK SW 65 CHARGE INH 30 +IND CAM DD ON –IN D 31 SCP D 29 CN182 D 3.2V A 4.9V TO L0145CPOWER BLOCK 3VAP P 5V 3 (SEE PAGE 3-27) 19 V REF 2.5V CAM DD ON 4 20 POW CONT 21 CTL B RT 16 CN802 D 3.2V SYS DD ON 29 22 CTL C, D CT 17 14 L018 EVF BL 4.75V 6 VREF 2.5V VREF 2.5V BL UNREG 24 TO Q020, 021, 022 LCD DD ON D POWER BLOCK 2 LCD DD ON 47 EVF 12V EVF 12V 10 (SEE PAGE 3-25) REG 11 CAM DD ON 25 CAM DD ON Q017, 019 EVF 3.1V 12 EVF DD ON 99 EVF DD ON 3-23 3-24 V REF 2.5V,

MVC-FD97

3-13. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 2

VF-143 BOARD MA-404 BOARD CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK

IC504 IC503 (SEE PAGE 4-62) SHOCK EVR CN402 CN301 DETECT (D/A CONVERTER) IC301A 4.9V (SEE PAGE 4-57) (SEE PAGE 4-58) 6 5 MIC AMP IC603 IC604 (SEE PAGE 4-62) RV001 LCD TIMING NOR ZOOM GENERATOR (SEE PAGE 4-60) CN501 CN303(SEE PAGE 4-60) W TD 3.2V D 3.2V 101D3.2V 4 14 CN601 15 EVF 3.1V L602 STB LCD902 16 5 17 EVF 12V L601 EVF 12V 1 COLORTO 18 LCD POWER BLOCK 1 (SEE PAGE 3-24) D 21 EVF BL 4.75V MONITOR 22 IC681 Q602, 603 USB I/F (SEE PAGE 4-26) IC601 IC602 BL UNREG L502 4 DC/AC AMPIC502 CONVERTER (SEE PAGE 4-59) FB681 Q681, 682 CN681 LCD (SEE PAGE 4-59) D 3.2V 3 MS DRIVER 9 SOCKET (SEE PAGE 4-57) D501 T601 IC508 IC505 IC506 L702D 3.2V (EYE SENSOR LED) L604 L605 INVERTER ND601 EEPROM 16M 16M TRANS BACK (SEE PAGE 4-25) FLASH SDRAM LIGHT (SEE PAGE 4-25) (SEE PAGE 4-25) FB501 IC702 IC703FB503 FDD INVERTER CONTROL (SEE PAGE 4-30) (SEE PAGE 4-30)

FC-85 BOARD (2/2) CN701

IC301 IC501 FDD P 5V 9 CAMERA IC901 IC502MC CAM, DSP VIDEO AMP SH DSP NAND GATE (SEE PAGE 4-18) IC302 (SEE PAGE 4-19) (SEE PAGE 4-23) (SEE PAGE 4-23) IC253 IC252 64M SDRAM Q701 – 704 5 FLOPPY BL UNREG DISK AUDIO AMP AUDIO DA/AD (SEE PAGE 4-20) DRIVE (SEE PAGE 4-33) CONVERTER IC651 CN702 UNIT(SEE PAGE 4-33) FDD 4.9V Q253 CLOCK GEN. FB304 IC406 5 FDD P 5V L255 (SEE PAGE 4-26) L303 D501 EEPROM L502 L254 L253 (SEE PAGE 4-32) ACCESS CN703 FB651 IC704 D 3.2V D 3.2V REC/PB AMP

STEPING

D 1.8V D 1.8V MOTOR DRIVE A 3.2V A 3.2V (SEE PAGE 4-27) CN301 A 4.9V A 4.9V Q317, 318 A 4.9V FDD P 5V FDD P 5V FLASH

UNIT

ST UNREG ST UNREG STUNREG

TO

POWER BLOCK 1 BL UNREG BL UNREG (SEE PAGE 3-24) B FDD 4.9V FDD 4.9V CAM DD ON CD-311 BOARD (1/2) Q102 – 105 CN101 CAM CN101 CAM 15V CAM 15V CAM –7.5V –7.5V CAM –7.5V 12 12 IC101

CCD

CAM –7.5V CAM -7.5V CAM 15V CAM 15V CAM 15V 11 11 IMAGER (SEE PAGE 4-8) CAM DD ON CN184 CAM P 5V CAM P 5V L181 CAM P 5V ND DRIVE+ 12 MND FILTER

MOTOR

L101 CAM 3.2V CAM 3.2V Q182 CH 3.2V D 3.2V F SENS VCC F SENS VCC FOCUS14 SENSOR L184 Z SENS VCC Z SENS VCC ZOOM IC184 IC185 IC186 IC102 IC101 IC181 IC183 IC182 8 SENSOR IRIS IRIS DRIVE EVR S/H, AGC, TIMING ND FILTER FOCUS/ZOOM IRIS(MECHA DRIVE HALL AMP (D/A CONV.) A/D CONV. GENERATOR DRIVE MOTOR DRIVE SHUTTER) (SEE PAGE 4-21) HALL BIAS/GAN (SEE PAGE 4-22) (SEE PAGE 4-15) (SEE PAGE 4-15) (SEE PAGE 4-21) (SEE PAGE 4-21) DRIVE CONTROL (SEE PAGE 4-22) (SEE PAGE 4-22) 3-25 3-26 L501 L252 L503 L504 FB301 FB302,

MVC-FD97

3-14. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 TYPE S/C model: Please refer to page 6 to discriminate the type of LCD. TYPE S TYPE C PANEL PANEL

PK-55 BOARD (2/2) UNIT UNIT

CN701 (2/2) CN901 CN901 PANEL 13.2V L901 VGH VGH 121114 PANEL –15.3V L902 VSS 9 VGL 3 D903 LCD901 D903 LCD901 15 PANEL 6.5V VCC 3 COLOR COLOR PANEL 3.2V LCD VREFH31 2 LCD MONITOR MONITOR

VDD

13 D 3.2V 23 11 PANEL 4.9V L903 VSH 12 VSH 24

VSH TO

POWER BLOCK 1 (SEE PAGE 3-24) A IC702 IC801 IC802 IC803 IC902 IC901 IC801 IC802 IC803 IC902 IC901 SHOCK D/A CONVERTER LCD BUFFER COM AMP, LCD TIMING D/A CONVERTER LCD BUFFER COM AMP, LCD TIMING DETECT (EVR) DRIVE (SEE PAGE 4-49) VCO GENERATOR (EVR) DRIVE (SEE PAGE 4-49) VCO GENERATOR (SEE PAGE 4-47) (SEE PAGE 4-49) (SEE PAGE 4-50) (SEE PAGE 4-51) (SEE PAGE 4-51) (SEE PAGE 4-49) (SEE PAGE 4-50) (SEE PAGE 4-51) (SEE PAGE 4-51) Q851, 852 Q861 D854

LED

D702 EVER 3.2V 25 CHARGE IC852 IC851 D701 CURRENT DC/DC FLASH DETECT CONTROL A 4.9V (SEE PAGE 4-54) (SEE PAGE 4-53) 32 D703

POWER

T851 L851 Q854, 856 CN8519 BL UNREG L852 L853 ND801SWITCHING INVERTER 10 TRANS 10 BACK

LIGHT VP-55 BOARD CD-311 BOARD (2/2)

CN236 Q205, 206 CN232 CN102 12 D 3.2V L207 3 S+3.2V 3 L15055Q209, 210 CN231 A+4.9V A+4.9V5 5 VAP IC150 SE150 SE151 UNIT PITCH YAW PITCH/YAW SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR AMP CN234 MANUAL (SEE PAGE 4-9)D 3.2V 6 FOCUS

BLOCK

IC208 IC209 IC210 IC204 IC205 IC206

TO

POWER BLOCK 1 A/D CONVERTER STEADY SHOT INVERTER DAMP AMP IC207 (SEE PAGE 3-24) C (SEE PAGE 4-42) CONTROL (SEE PAGE 4-42) CONTROL (SEE PAGE 4-41) INVERTER(SEE PAGE 4-42) (SEE PAGE 4-41) (SEE PAGE 4-42) Q203, 204 Q211, 208 3 VAP P 5V L201 Q201, 202 IC203 PROTECT VAP LOCK MOTOR DRIVE IC201 IC202 (SEE PAGE 4-41) YAW PITCH DRIVE DRIVE (SEE PAGE 4-41) (SEE PAGE 4-41) 4 CAM DD ON 3-27 3-28 E L701 L206 L205 L801 L802 L204 L801 L802,

MVC-FD97 SECTION 4 PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS (In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block) (For printed wiring boards) (Measuring conditions voltage and waveform) • b: Pattern from the side which enables seeing. • Voltages and waveforms are measured between the (The other layers’ patterns are not indicated) measurement points and ground when camera shoots • Through hole is omitted. color bar chart of pattern box. They are reference values • Circled numbers refer to waveforms. and reference waveforms. * • There are a few cases that the part printed on diagram (VOM of DC 10 MΩ input impedance is used) isn’t mounted in this model. • Voltage values change depending upon input impedance • Chip parts. of VOM used.) Transistor DiodeC6544562112333121. Connection Pattern boxBE12332134554321212143(For schematic diagrams) • All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µ µF. 50 V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics Front side of the lens and tantalums. • Chip resistors are 1/10 W unless otherwise noted. 1.5m kΩ=1000 Ω, MΩ=1000 kΩ. • Caution when replacing chip parts. New parts must be attached after removal of chip. Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, Because it is damaged by the heat. • Some chip part will be indicated as follows. Example C541 L452 22U 10UH 2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of Fig. TA A 2520 a and the Fig. b can be obtain. Kinds of capacitor H Temperature characteristics External dimensions (mm) • Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX indicate that they are not used. In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated. • Parts with ★ differ according to the model/destination. A B A=BBARefer to the mount table for each function. • All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic Fig. a (Video output terminal waveform) curve B, unless otherwise noted. • Signal name XEDIT → EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC Color bar chart • 2: non flammable resistor picture frame • 1: fusible resistor Monitor TV • C: panel designation picture frame • A: B+ Line * • B: B– Line * • J : IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE. * • C: adjustment for repair. * Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV) • Circled numbers refer to waveforms. * * Indicated by the color red. Note : The components identified by mark 0 or When indicating parts by reference number, please dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. include the board name. Replace only with part number specified. Note : Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifie. 4-1 Yellow Cyan Green Yellow White Cyan Magenta Green Red White Blue Magenta Red Blue,

MVC-FD97

4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 J001 S355 CN001 3P DC IN

A

S351 PROGRAM AE ACV_UNREG 1 SPOT METER (-) ACV_GND 2 BATT/XEXT 3 S352 S356 BT901

FLOPPY DISK DRIVE BATTERY

PROGRAM AE ONE-PUSH FU-153 BOARD TERMINAL WHITE BALANCE (+) CN002 4P

B AE-25 BOARD BATT_UNREG 1

BATT_SIG 2 S353 S WHITE BALANCE BATT_GND 3CONTROL SWITCH DC_PACK_SW 4

BLOCK SIDE 0 SIDE 1

S354 PROGRAM AE S001 (SHUTTER) RV001

ZOOM C W T D FP-174 FU-54 FLXIBLE FU-53 HARNESS HARNESS

CN301 10P CN402 10P A_4.9V 1 10 A_4.9V

E MIC_GND29MIC_GND

MIC_SIG38MIC_SIG MIC_GND47MIC_GND VAP UNIT D_3.2V56D_3.2V ZOOM_SW_AD65ZOOM_SW_AD XRS_ON274XRS_ON2 FP-168 FLEXIBLE CN305 2P XRS_ON183XRS_ON1 MIC901 1 MIC_SIG REG_GND92REG_GND

F MICRO PHONE MA-404 BOARD2 MIC_GND KEY_AD4 10 1 KEY_AD4

CN101 18P CN101 18P GND11GND CCD_OUT22CCD_OUT

G GND33GND CN182 16P CN236 16P CN235 5P LENS UNIT GND44GND

SYS_V11SYS_V NC 5 V455V4 FC-85 BOARD(1/2) VAP_GND22VAP_GND LOCK - 4 M V3A66V3A VAP_P_5V33VAP_P_5V LOCK + 3 V3B77V3B CAM DD ON44CAM DD ON SENS IN 2 VAP LOCKMOTOR V288V2 A+4.9V55A+4.9V SENS OUT 1 V1A99V1A VAP RESET66VAP RESET V1B 10 10 V1B VAP CS77VAP CS

H CAM_15V 11 11 CAM_15V CAM_SI88CAM_SI

CAM_-7.5V 12 12 CAM_-7.5V CAM_SO99CAM_SO CN234 6P GND 13 13 GND CAM SCK 10 10 CAM SCK D3.2V 6 H2 14 14 H2 REG_GND 11 11 REG_GND FOCUS_B 5

FP-177 MANUAL

H1 15 15 H1 D+3.2V 12 12 D+3.2V FOCUS_A 4

FLEXIBLE FOCUS

RG 16 16 RG VAP_LOCK_ON 13 13 VAP_LOCK_ON GND 3

CD-311 BOARD BLOCKVSUB_CONT 17 17 VSUB_CONT VAP_LOCK_SENS 14 14 VAP_LOCK_SENS NC 2

VSHT 18 18 VSHT FORCUS_A 15 15 FORCUS_A NC 1I FORCUS_B 16 16 FORCUS_B CN102 7P CN232 7P GND11GND OUT_122OUT_1 S+3.2V33S+3.2V C_RESET44C_RESET S+3.2V55S+3.2V OUT_266OUT_2 VP-55 BOARD GND77GND

J

05 FP-170 FLEXIBLE

FRAME (1/2)

4-3 4-4 CN306 5P CN351 5P REG_GND15REG_GND REG_GND24REG_GND N.C33N.C

CCD IMAGER KEY_AD442KEY_AD4

KEY_AD451KEY_AD4 CN303 6P XRS_ON1 6 XRS_ON2 5 UNREG_GND 4 D_3.2V 3 ZOOM_SW_AD 2 UNREG_GND 1

FP-166 FLEXIBLE FP-171 FLEXIBLE

CN001 12P CN004 12P CN183 26P REG_GND 12 12 REG_GND 1 FOCUS_A REG_GND 11 11 REG_GND 2 FOCUS_B REG_GND 10 10 REG_GND 3 FOCUS_B REG_GND99REG_GND 4 FOCUS_A BATT_UNREG88BATT_UNREG 5 F_SENS_GND UNREG477UNREG4 6 F_SENS_RST UNREG466UNREG4 7 F_SENS_VCC UNREG355UNREG3 8 HALL- UNREG344UNREG3 9 BIAS- UNREG233UNREG2 10 HALL+ UNREG222UNREG2 11 BIAS+ UNREG111UNREG1 12 DRIVE+ 13 DRIVE- 14 ZOOM_A 15 ZOOM_B CN002 5P CN003 5P 16 ZOOM_B BATT_SIG11BATT_SIG 17 ZOOM_A BATT/XEXT22BATT/XEXT 18 Z_SENS_GND FAST_CHARGE_ON33FAST_CHARGE_ON 19 Z_SENS_VCC INIT_CHARGE_ON44INIT_CHARGE_ON 20 Z_SENS_RST DC_PACK_SW55DC_PACK_SW 21 TEMP_OUT 22 TEMP_COM_(GND) 23 ND_CONT- 24 ND_DRIVE- 25 ND_DRIVE+ 26 ND_CONT+ CN703 5P R/W_B 1 R/W_A 2 COMMON 3 ERASE 4

FP-169 FLEXIBLE SHIELD 5

CN702 5P COMMON 5 R/W_A 4 R/W_B 3 ERASE 2 CN231 13P SHIELD1PDRIVEA1PDRIVEB2PDUMPA3PDUMPB4CN701 19P A+4.9V 5 PA1YOUT 6 PB 2 GND 7 PNA 3 TEMP OUT 8 PNB4POUT 9 FDD_5V(A) 5 Y DUMP B 10 STBY(K) 6 Y DUMP A 11 TOS1(C) 7 Y DRIVE B 12 FDD_GND(E) 8 Y DRIVE A 13 FDD_5V 9 FDD_5V 10 INDEX 11 MC 12 FDD_LED_IN 13 CLOCK 14 FDD_GND 15 FDD_GND 16 HDS 17 FPTS 18 DISK 19,

MVC-FD97 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 OPEN CPC ND801

FLASH UNIT (FLASH) (FOR CHECK) BACK LIGHT A B

CN801 50P CN701 50P AV_JACK_IN 1 50 AV_JACK_IN VIDEO_OUT 2 49 VIDEO_OUT VIDEO_GND 3 48 VIDEO_GND AUDIO_OUT 4 47 AUDIO_OUT

VF-143 BOARD AUDIO_GND 5 46 AUDIO_GND C CN501 27P REG_GND 6 45 REG_GND

CN601 16P CN802 26P XHI_SCK 27 LANC_SIG 7 44 LANC_SIG PK-55 BOARD 16 COM 1 XHI_SCK ATA_FROM_HI 26 LANC_JACK_IN 8 43 LANC_JACK_IN CN901 24P 15G2DATA_FROM_HI When the machine needs to be repaired, XCS_EVF_EVR 25 LANC_DC 9 42 LANC_DC please refer to page 6 to discriminatethe type of LCD(TYPE S or TYPE C) VSH/CLD 2414R3XCS_EVF_EVR EVF_BL_GND 24 EXT_STRB_ON/SENS 10 41 EXT_STRB_ON/SENS VDD/SPD 23 13B4EVF_BL_GND EVF_BL_GND 23 REG_GND 11 40 REG_GND 12 BLK 5 EVF_BL_GND S701 S702 VR/CTR 22 VF_BL_4.75V 22 MOVE/XSTILL 12 39 MOVE/XSTILL (CONTROL BUTTON) DISPLAY VB/EX3 21 11 HCK1 6 EVF_BL_4.75V

D VF_BL_4.75V 21 XPOWER_LED 13 38 XPOWER_LED VG/EX2 2010 HCK2 7 EVF_BL_4.75V

VCO 20 XBATT_CHG_LED 14 37 XBATT_CHG_LED VSS/VB12 19 9 HST 8 VCO EVF_VG 19 SHOCK SENS 15 36 SHOCK SENS S703 MODE1/RES 18 8 RGT 9 EVF_VG EVF_12.0V 18 KEY_AD2 16 35 KEY_AD2 POWER MCLK/TST 17 7 DWN 10 EVF_12.0V ON/OFF EVF_12.0V 17 KEY_AD1 17 34 KEY_AD1 HCNT/VR 16 6 ENB 11 EVF_12.0V EVF_3.1V 16 XSTROBE_LED 18 33 XSTROBE_LED CLT/VG 15 5 STB 12 EVF_3.1V EVF_3.1V 15 A_4.9V 19 32 A_4.9V OE/VB 14 4 VCK 13 EVF_3.1V LCD901 D_3.2V 14 PANEL_3.2V 20 31 PANEL_3.2V SRTL/GND 13 3 VST 14 D_3.2V COLOR GND 13

E 2 EVF_GND 15 GND FC-85 BOARD (2/2)

PANEL_B-Y 21 30 PANEL_B-Y S704 SRTR/VSH 12 LCD D701 VOLUME (+) GND 12 XCAM/PB_SW 22 29 XCAM/PB_SW MONITOR 1 EVF_12.0V 16 GND (FLASH LED(AMBER)) VBC/COM 11 EVF_XVD 11 PANEL_Y 23 28 PANEL_Y VCOM/VGL 10 17 EVF_XVD EVF_R-Y 10 D501 XPWR_SW 24 FP-175 27 XPWR_SW MODE2/VSS 9 18 EVF_R-Y (ACCESS LED(RED)) S401 D501 FLEXIBLE S705EVF_Y 9 (MS/FD) PANEL_R-Y 25 26 PANEL_R-Y 19 EVF_Y FLASH RESET/MO2 8 EVF_B-Y 8 EVER_3.2V 26 25 EVER_3.2V GSRT/MO1 7 20 EVF_B-Y D702 EVF_XHD 7 MAKER_RECOG 27 24 MAKER_RECOG (CHARGE LED(AMBER)) GPCK/EX1 6 21 EVF_XHD SENSOR_GND 6 VG 28 23 VG S706 GRES/SPS 5

F Q501

22 SENSOR_GND EVF_LED_ON 5 HSY 29 22 HSY VOLUME (-) VREFL/CLS 4 23 EVF_LED_ON BL_UNREG 4 PANEL_COM 30 21 PANEL_COM VGL/VCC 3 24 BL_UNREG EVF_SENS 3 XCS_PANEL_D/A 31 20 XCS_PANEL_D/A D703 VREFH/VSH 2 25 EVF_SENS SENSOR_GND 2 PANEL_V 32 19 PANEL_V (POWER LED(GREEN)) VGH 1 D501,Q501 26 SENSOR_GND (EYE SENSOR) SENSOR_GND 1 HI_SO 33 18 HI_SO PLAY/STILL/MOVIE Note:CN901 Pin Name HDO 34 17 HDO A/BS707 S709 A:TYPE C XHI_SCK 35 16 XHI_SCK (PLAY) (MOVIE) B:TYPE S PANEL_6.5V 36 15 PANEL_6.5V CN401 6P CN401 6P CN702 2P

G PANEL_-15.3V 37 14 PANEL_-15.3VREG_GND61REG_GND SP - 2

D_3.2V 38 13 D_3.2V SP901 FOCUS_B52FOCUS_B SP + 1 SPEAKER PANEL_13.2V 39 12 PANEL_13.2V FOCUS_A43FOCUS_A BT701 S708 PANEL_4.9V 40 11 PANEL_4.9V (LITHIUM BATTERY) LCD ON/OFF D_3.2V/KEY_AD334D_3.2V/KEY_AD3 BL_UNREG 41 10 BL_UNREG REG_GND25REG_GND BL_UNREG 42 9 BL_UNREG KEY_AD016KEY_AD0 J781 REG_GND(UNREG_GND) 43 8 REG_GND(UNREG_GND) AV OUT S403 REG_GND(UNREG_GND) 44 7 REG_GND(UNREG_GND) S401 S402 STEADY

H MACRO FOCUS SHOT REG_GND 45 6 REG_GND CN781 6PMANUAL AUTO OFF ON XRIGHT_DOWN(NC) 46 5 XRIGHT_DOWN(NC) JACK_GND 1

AU_SP+ 47 4 AU_SP+ JACK_GND 2 AU_SP- 48 3 AU_SP- LANC_DC 3 XLEFT_DOWN(NC) 49 2 XLEFT_DOWN(NC) EXT_STB_ON 4 ACC BATT 50 1 BATT XLANC_JACK_IN 5

CF-83 BOARD LANC_SIG 6 I

10 1 CN201 5P GND 5

J ID 4 FP-335

D+ 3 FLEXIBLE D- 2 BOARD VCC 1

FRAME (2/2)

4-5 4-6

LCD902 EVF LCD FP-172 FLEXIBLE FP-173 FLEXIBLE USB

CN301 10P STB_CHARGE 1 STRB_PHOTO_ON 2 POP_UP_ON 3 A_4.9V 4 UNREG_GND 5 PHOTO_TR_OUT 6 TALLY 7 UNREG 8 STRB_ON 9 XSTB_FULL 10 CN682 6P 6 GND_GUARD CN803 22P 5 USB_D+ EVF_VCO 22 4 USB_JACK_IN EVF_VG 21 3 USB_D- EVF_BL_4.75 20 2 GND EVF_BL+ 19 1 GND HI_VDD 18 RESET 17 RXD 16 TXD 15 PF7 14 MAKER_RECOG 13 LANC_OUT 12 CN681 10P LANC_IN 11 1 VSS HI_UNREG 10 2 BS VG93VCC COM84DIO HSY75N.C TRACK_00 6

MEMORY STICK

6 INT NC57N.C REG_GND48SCLK INDEX39VCC FDDRF_A 2 10 VSS FDDRF_B 1 CN851 10P BL_CASE 1 LED 2 BL_LOW 3 N.C 4 N.C 5 N.C 6 N.C 7 N.C 8 N.C 9 BL_HIGT 10

FP-176 FLEXIBLE

,

MVC-FD97

4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

CD-311 (CCD IMAGER, STEADY SHOT SENSOR) PRINTED WIRING BOARD AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-69 for waveforms.

– Ref. No.: CD-311 board; 2,000 series – 1234567• For Printed Wiring Board. CD-311 BOARD (1/2) • CD-311 board is four-layer print board. A CCD IMAGER(CCD BLOCK) However, the patterns of layers 2 to 3 have -REF.NO.:2,000 SERIES- not been included in the diagram. XX MARK:NO MOUNT • There are a few cases that the part isn't NO MARK:REC/PB MODE mounted in this model is printed on this R:REC MODE diagram. P:PB MODE • See page 4-73 for printed parts location. • Chip transistorBCQ102 R101 2SC4178-F13F14-T1CN101 18P 0 BUFFER GND 1 R14.9/ CCD_OUT 2 P0 R109BEC109 0 GND 3 IC101 10p GND 4 R9.7/ CCD IMAGER P0 V4 5

C C107V3A 6 C110R-7.2/P0 0.1u XX16V

V3B 7 FC-85 BOARD (1/12) 12345678V2 8 R108 CN101 3300 THROUGH THE V1A93FP-166 FLEXIBLE V1B 10 L101 (SEE PAGE 4-15) 100uH12CAM_15V 11 CAM_-7.5V 12 R10205GND 13 4

D 6H2 14

C101 H1 15 D101 10u XX 20V RG 16 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 VSUB_CONT 17 R1.3/ P0 R14.9/P0 VSHT 18 R112 R104 10 R105 12 C111 SIGNAL PATH C108 R103 C105 XX47 0.1u R107 0.1u 220k 16V VIDEO C103

E 0.1uSIGNAL C104 R1060.01u 2200 Q101

C102 16V UN9213J-(K8).SO Y/CHROMA 22u R8/P0 SWITCH 16V C106 0.1u REC 0 16V12

Precautions for Replacement of CCD Imager

6 5 • The CD-311 board mounted as a repair part is not equippedwith a CCD imager.

When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the

4 old one and mount it onto the new one. • If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the adjustments for the camera section. • As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC.

In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts

nor exposed to strong light. 4-7

CCD IMAGER, STEADY SHOT SENSOR

CD-311 (1/2) 4-8 R111

XX

IC101 ICX284AQ-13 H2 V4 R-7.2/P0 R1.8/P0 H1 V3A R-7.2/P0 RG V3B R13.2/P0 R-0.3/P0 VL V2 R-7.5/P0 R-0.3/P0 R110 CSUB V1A 47 R8/P0 R-0.3/P0VSHT V1B R7.5/P0 GND GND VDD VOUT R10.4/P0 R10.4/P0,

MVC-FD97 CD-311 (STEADY SHOT SENSOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-7 for CD-311 printed wiring board.

123456789

CD-311 BOARD (2/2) A STEADY SHOT SENSOR(SENSOR BLOCK)

-REF.NO.:2,000 SERIES-

XX MARK:NO MOUNT NO MARK:REC/PB MODE R:REC MODE P:PB MODE B R160

15k R157 C152 10k R150 22u C163141422k 4V 0.022u R153 C157 C159 C161 22k 0.015u 0.015u 22u SE152 PITCH SE150 PITCH XX SENS. SENS. R158 470k CN102 7P23231GND C150

C 0.022u 2 OUT-1 VP-55 BOARD IC150 3 S+3.2V CN23210987654321

4 C-RESET THROUGH THER154 PITCH/YAW 0 FP-170 FLEXIBLESENSOR AMP 5 S+3.2V (SEE PAGE 4-41) 6 OUT-2 C154 C155 XX XX 7 GND 4V 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

D R0.7/P0 0 R2.9/P0

C156 R151 0.015u 22k R152 22k1414C158 C160 R155 0.015u 22u 470k C151 0.022u SE153 YAW SE151 YAW XX SENS. SENS. R159

E 15k2323L15010uH

C153 R156 22u 10k 4V C1620.022u C164 C165 0.01u 22u 6.3V

STEADY SHOT SENSOR

4-9 4-10 CD-311 (2/2)

GND

R0.9/P0 LIB2 R0.7/P0LIB1 R1.3/P0 LIA2 LIA1 R0.9/P0 R1.3/P0 LO2 LO1 R1.4/P0 R1.3/P0 HI2 HI1 R1.4/P0 R1.3/P0 HO2 HO1 R1.3/P0 R1.3/P0 Vref2 Vref1 R1.3/P0 R1.2/P0 AM2 AM1 R1.3/P0 OUT2 OUT1 R1.3/P0

CRST

VCC PASS IC150 UPC6756GR-8JG-E2,

MVC-FD97

VP-55 (STEADY SHOT CONTROL) PRINTED WIRING BOARD – Ref. No.: VP-55 board; 2,000 series – • For Printed Wiring Board. • VP-55 board is four-layer print board. However, the patterns of layers 2 to 3 have not been included in the diagram. • There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram. • See page 4-76 for printed parts location. • Chip transistor

C

BEKA

K

5413

STEADY SHOT CONTROL

VP-55 4-39 4-4054354113,

MVC-FD97 VP-55 (STEADY SHOT CONTROL) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-39 for VP-55 printed wiring board. • See page 4-71 for Waveforms.

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

VP-55 BOARD IC206,207 A INVERTER STEADY SHOT CONTROL L207

R238 C225 10uH -REF.NO.:2,000 SERIES- 22k 0.022u R252 R25347k 47k

XX MARK:NO MOUNT

R229 R233 C237

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY XX 100k R239 C224 4.7u R:REC MODE ±0.5%

±0.5% 22k 0.047u 6.3V 1.5 1.5

P:PB MODE C217

XX C235 :IMPOSSIBLE TO MEASURE THE R240R231 22k321321B * R201 R218 R235 2.93330.01u CN236 16P VOLTAGE AT THE MARKED POINTS. 1k 3300 220k 100k ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.5% C227 R2.4/P0 R2.4/P0 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 16 FORCUS_B 3300p R204 C236 15 FORCUS_A 1k ±0.5% IC20445450.01u R258 0 14 VAP_LOCK_SENS R259 0 REF.VOLTAGE GEN. C218 R217 C210 R237DAMP CONTROL XX C222 13 VAP_LOCK_ON 15k 0.47u XX XX R4.7/P0 R257 C228 10u 10V 1k 12 D+3.2VR227 47k L204 Q209 ±0.5% 100uH 2SB1218A-QRS-TX A VSS 11 REG_GND3 0 R4.7/P0 4.9 VAP SCK 10 CAM SCK 2.7 R251 VAP SO 9 CAM_SO FC-85 BOARD (4/12)C 47kIC202 1.3C204 CN182R248 8 CAM_SI0.068u 14 13 12 11 1098765432110k R4.1/P4.9 VAP SI 3 THROUGH THE PITCH DRIVE8765Q210 VAP CS 7 VAP CS FP-169 FLEXIBLER0/P4.9 UN9213J-(K8).SO R3/P0 (SEE PAGE 4-21) R3.1/P0 IC209 VAP RESET 6 VAP RESET GND R2553R/P2.2 1M 5 A+4.9V CN231 13P C201 Q209,210 * STEADY SHOT CONTROL EXTAL134CAM DD ON Y DRIVE A 13 2.2u A+4.9V Vpp(NC)C231 SWITCH 3 R1.5/P3 R254 270 6.3V 10u IC209 XTAL 3 VAP_P_5V Y DRIVE B 121234VDD10V CXP81120-047R-T6R2092YDUMP A 11 1k GND(VSS) MP X201 2 VAP_GND ±0.5% 12MHz

D 1 SYS_VY DUMP B 10 1

P OUT 9

VAP TEMP OUT812345678910 11 12 13 14R210 10k ±0.5% R1.5/P3 UNIT GND 7 R228 Q206

Y OUT 6 47k UN9213J-±0.5% 3 2 1(K8).SO A+4.9V 5 C202 R203 R213 3300 ±0.5% P DUMPB41k C215 R1.5/P02.2u 6.3V ±0.5% 10u IC210 P DUMPA36.3V C219 C223 XX R3.145XX R236 /P0 INVERTERE P DRIVEB2XX C229R211 C209 3300p Q211 P DRIVEA10.47u R232 R243 Q206,206 UN9213J- R206 15k 220k 100k C238S+3.2V R0/P3.1 (K8).SO12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 FB201 100k ±0.5% ±0.5% 0.1uSWITCH R3.1/P0 R245 C220 R241

IC205 22k Q205 10k

33033

XX

R234 2SB1218A- R4.8/P0 R230 QRS-TX R0/P4.9 Q208,211AMP 100kXX ±0.5% C226 VAP_P_5V ±0.5% 0.047u R244 R2.3 R246 R249 SWITCH8765R242 22k /P3 47k 1k 22k R4.1/P4.9 C230 R2.9 3 R250F L201 0.022u /P0 10k 10uH R4.8/P0 4.91234Q208 2SA1588-OY-TE85L C211 10u 10V

IC201

R205 R207 10k 10k YAW DRIVE ±0.5% ±0.5% L206 C234

G 10uH 0.1u

CN232 7P GND 7 FB260 C232L205 4.7u OUT-2 6 10uH CD-311 BOARD FB261 R247 10V S+3.2V 5 22k CN102 FB262 C233 THROUGH THE C-RESET 4 0.001u FP-170 FLEXIBLE S+3.2V 3 (SEE PAGE 4-10) FB263 OUT-1 2

H FB264GND 1

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 R212 10k Q207 IC208 UN9213J-(K8).SO INVERTER A/D CONVERTER IC208 R219 Q201 MB88102PFV-G-BND-ER 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO 2.21/8W

I12345678910R4.8/P0

IC203 R220 Q203,204 R4.8/P0 100kLB1830M-TLM B+ SWITCH Q203 C205 C207 R4.8/P0 3 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO 0.1u 1u R4.8/P0 VCC IN2 0 R4.8/P0 R4.8/P0 4.9 R202 OUT2 IN1CN235 5P 1k L202 R225R4.1/P0 GND VM 10uH R224 0 SENS OUT10OUT1 VREF R4.2/P4.9 47k

M SENS IN 2 Q201,202 R4.8/P0 R2.4/P0VS VCONT R0/P4.9 R223 10k

LOCK + 3 PROTECT Q202 R3.1/P0

J 2SB1462J- C213VAP LOCK LOCK - 4 QR(K8).SO 4.7u R226

MOTOR R216 NC 5 4700 10V XX C212 Q204

IC203 0.1u UN9213J-(K8).SOCN234 6P

NC 1 VAP LOCK

MANUAL NC 2 MOTOR DRIVE FOCUS GND 3

FOCUS_A 4

BLOCK FOCUS_B 5

D3.2V 6

K D201MAZT082H08S0

R266 LND201 XX STATIC GND LND202 05 STATIC GND

STEADY SHOT CONTROL

4-41 4-42 VP-55

FP-168 FLEXIBLE FP-177 FLEXIBLE

C203 0.068u IC201 NJM3414AV(TE2) R2.1/P0 OUT1 VCC C206 R2.4/P0 0.001u IN1- OUT2 R2.6/P0 R2.4/P0 IN1+ IN2- R2.4/P0 GND IN2+ R2.4/P0 IC202 NJM3414AV(TE2) R2.4/P0 VCC R4.8/P0 OUT1 C208 R2.4/P0 R2.4/P0 0.001uOUT2 IN1- R214 R2.4/P0 IN2- R2.4/P0 100k54321IN1+ IN2+ R2.4/P0

GND

R215 10k ±0.5% IC204 NJM324V(TE2) 678910 R2.4/P0 OUT1 OUT4 IN1- IN4- R2.4/P0 R222 47k R221 47k IN1+ IN4+ R4.7/P0 VCC GND R2.4/P0 IN2+ IN3+ R2.4/P0 R2.4/P0 IN2- IN3- R2.4/P0 OUT2 OUT3 R2.4/P0 C214 4.7u 4V OUT3 OUT2 R2.4/P0 R2.4/P0 IN3- IN2- R*/P0 R*/P0 IN3+ IN2+ R2.4/P0 R2.4/P0 GND VCC R4.7/P0 IN4+ IN1+ R2.4/P0 R2.4/P0 IN4- IN1- R2.4/P0 R2.4/P0 OUT4 OUT1 R2.4/P0 R2.4/P0 IC205 NJM3403AV(TE2) IC206 TC7SET04FU(TE85R) IC207 TC7SET04FU(TE85R) R1.3/P0.2 4.9 PS AVRH R1.3/P0.2 AVRH 4.9 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49YS P OUT NC Y OUT GND TEMP HSTX DET CI CSX 3AN7 AN8 VCC 3 DO 1.4TCLKX SYS V R1.5/P0 CLK VSS 1.5 C-RESET P PWM 1.5 Y PWM 1.4 VAP HSTX VAP SIN VAP SOUT VAP SCK STBY VAP CS VAP LOCK- VM LOCK A VDD AV REF 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 R256 47k IC210 TC7S04FU(TE85R),

MVC-FD97

PK-55 (MODE SWITCH, A/V OUT, LCD DRIVE, LCD TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT DRIVE) PRINTED WIRING BOARD – Ref. No.: PK-55 board; 2,000 series – • For Printed Wiring Board. • PK-55 board is four-layer print board. However, the patterns of layers 2 to 3 have not been included in the diagram. • There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram. • See page 4-76 for printed parts location. • Chip transistorC54BE123

BT701

( BATTERY, K KLITHIUM SECONDARY ( AKK

A

K K

A

4 3 1065143511234510 (MOVIE) PLAY/STILL/MOVIE (PLAY) 4-43

MODE SWITCH, A/V OUT, LCD DRIVE, LCD TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT DRIVE

PK-55 4-44,

MVC-FD97 DISPLAY

(CHARGE)

POWER

ON/OFF

CONTROL

(POWER) FLASH AV OUT (FLASH) VOLUME(–)

VOLUME

(+) 4 2 LCDON/OFF517892321454-46

MODE SWITCH, A/V OUT, LCD DRIVE, LCD TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT DRIVE

4-45 PK-55

A

K K

A

K K

A

K K

A

K K,

MVC-FD97 PK-55 (MODE SWITCH, A/V OUT) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-43 for PK-55 printed wiring board.

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15

PK-55 BOARD (1/4) A MODE SWITCH,A/V OUT(LK BLOCK,JACK BLOCK) SIGNAL PATH

-REF.NO.:2,000 SERIES- VIDEO SIGNAL

XX MARK:NO MOUNT AUDIO NO MARK:REC/PB MODE CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL

1 PANEL_3.2V

REC

PK-55 BOARD (2/4) D_3.2V REG_GND

B PB

2 PANEL_3.2V PK-55 BOARD (3/4) REG_GND D_3.2V 7 PK-55 BOARD (2/4) VG PANEL_6.5V XHI_SCK 8 HI_SO PK-55 BOARD (2/4) XCS_PANEL_D/A

C PANEL_Y

PANEL_R-Y PANEL_B-Y 9 PANEL_13.2V PK-55 BOARD (3/4) PANEL_-15.3V R782 1k FB789

HDO

FB788 J781 PANEL_V AVOUT 10 FB790 PANEL_COM

D PK-55 BOARD (3/4) HSY R787 C781 C782 C783

1k XX XX XX MAKER_RECOG FB791 D785 MA111-(K8).S0 CN701 50P D786 MAZT082H08S0 AV_JACK_IN 50 LND783 VIDEO_OUT 49 FB787 FLAME_GND VIDEO_GND 48 D787 D788 MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0 AUDIO_OUT 47 LND784

E AUDIO_GND 46 FLAME_GND

REG_GND 45 LANC_SIG 44 LANC_JACK_IN 43 DISPLAY VOLUME (+) VOLUME (-) LCD ON/OFF LANC_DC 42 R718 R720 S704 R722 S706 R723 S708 2700 S702 4700 6800 33k EXT_STRB_ON/SENS 41 REG_GND 40

F MOVE/XSTILL 39 R7161800 1

XPOWER_LED 38 UP RIGHT XBATT_CHG_LED 37 SET SET S SHOCK SENS 36 KEY_AD2 35 KEY_AD1 34 D702 LEFT DOWN XSTROBE_LED 33 TLYU1002(TPX1,SONY) A_4.9V 32 (CHARGE LED(AMBER)) S701 PANEL_3.2V 31 CONTROL BUTTONG R710 PANEL_B-Y 30 270 R719 R717 FLASH 2700 1800 XCAM/PB_SW 29 FC-85 BOARD (12/12) R721 S7054700 CN801 PANEL_Y 28 THROUGH THE XPWR_SW 27 FP-175 FLEXIBLE PANEL_R-Y 26 (SEE PAGE 4-37) EVER_3.2V 25 MAKER_RECOG 24 VG 23 S703H D701 POWER PLAY/STILL/MOVIE HSY 22 TLYU1002(TPX1,SONY) ON/OFF (FLASH LED(AMBER)) S707 S709 PANEL_COM 21 (PLAY) (MOVIE) XCS_PANEL_D/A 20 D703 TLGU1002(TPX1,SONY) PANEL_V 19 (POWER LED(GREEN)) HI_SO 18 R708 R714 680 680 HDO 17 R724 XHI_SCK 16 10k

I PANEL_6.5V 15

PANEL_-15.3V 14 LND701 D_3.2V 13 DUMMY FP-176 CN781 6P FLEXIBLE PANEL_13.2V 12 L702 C705 FB782 47uH 22u SE701 IC702 6 LANC_SIG PANEL_4.9V 11 6.3V (SHOCK SENSOR) TA6009FN(EL) 5 XLANC_JACK_IN BL_UNREG 10 0.3 TRIP C710 0.47u FB783S1A R713 4 EXT_STB_ONBL_UNREG 9 0.3 AO 0.9 11k ±0.5% 3 LANC_DC ACC REG_GND(UNREG_GND) 8 R704 S1BC706 XX BI 1.1 0.22u GUARD 2 JACK_GND

J REG_GND(UNREG_GND) 7 3 1.1

FB784 BO R715 REG_GND 6 OUT 150k 1 JACK_GND R703 VCC 3.1 XRIGHT_DOWN(NC) 5 GND C711 FB785 AU_SP+ 4 68p AU_SP- 3 R712 XLEFT_DOWN(NC) 2 R727 IC702XX FB78633 SHOCK DETECT BATT 1 BT701 D784 (LITHIUM BATTERY) MA111-(K8).S011 BL_GND PK-55 BOARD (4/4) BL_UNREG D782MAZT082H08S0

K PANEL_4.9V LND78112 FB781

PK-55 BOARD (3/4) PANEL_4.9V FLAME_GNDD783 D789 D790 CN702 2P MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0 LND782 SP901 SP + 1 FLAME_GND 05 SPEAKER SP - 2

MODE SWITCH, A/V OUT PK-55 (1/4) 4-47 4-48

54321678910,

MVC-FD97 PK-55 (LCD DRIVE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-43 for PK-55 printed wiring board. • See page 4-71 for waveforms.

12345678910 11 12

PK-55 BOARD (2/4) A LCD DRIVE(RGB BLOCK)

-REF.NO.:2,000 SERIES-

XX MARK:NO MOUNT NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

R812 47k *R817 12k:TYPE S

B 5600:TYPE C

R808 R813 R817 C811 BL_LEV 22k 15k * 10u L802 BL_LEV PK-55 BOARD (4/4)L801 10uH 100uH R818 10V PANEL_3.2V R809 R814 39k C813 P_4.9V12k 33k 0.1u PK-55 BOARD (3/4) 1 IC801 D_3.2V MB40D001PFV-G-BND-ER PK-55 BOARD (1/4) C801 0.1u 3.1 0 VDD P_MUTE C807 C80847u C812

C 3.2 3 6.3V

0.1u 10u REG_GND VCC BRT_TST214.9 6.6 10V C802 0.1u H_REV 3.2 1.5 BL_LEV 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25H_REV BL_LEVEL 5 V_REV 3.2 1.3 V-COM V_REV V-COM NTSC 3.2067

VCO

NTSC VCO VG PK-55 BOARD (1/4) COMTST 0 2.2 COM_ADJ 2.5 PANEL_6.5V COMTST COM_ADJ COM_BLK B_OUT VB C806 3 1.9 C814

D 2.9 2.2 AMP 0.1u XTEST B_DC_DET 0.33uXHI_SCK CLK RGB_AMP 2 2.5

BRIGHT G_OUT VG 0.1 2.7 2.7 1.9 C815 HI_SO SI CONT CONTRAST G_DC_DET 0.33u 8 COM-O1.4 BRT_B COM_OUT IC802 2.5R_OUT VR PK-55 BOARD (1/4) SO BRT_B 3.3 1.9SUB_CON_B LCD DRIVE C816 R_DC_DET 0.33u COM-O 3.1 1.7 BRT_R COM-O XCS_PANEL_D/A XEN BRT_R SUB_CON_R IC802 GND1 3.1 IR3Y37A4 3.1 1.1 COLOR VCC1 GND2 4PANEL_Y FRPVVDDA COLOR FRPV PANEL_R-Y OSD_B SYNC_OUT FRPT2 3.1 FRPT

E PANEL_B-Y

VSS BRIGHT OSD_G SYNC_IN 4.6 OSD_R 2 EXT_BGP P_XHD0 1

IC801 BLACK_IN SYNC_SEPR805XX

D/A CONVERTER(EVR) 17 COMTST PK-55 BOARD (3/4) 0 INB 4.9 COMTST VCC NTSC

NTSC

0 INA V_REV012345678910 11 12 V_REV OUT 1.8 H_REV

F GND 0 1.9221.2 3 H_REVV-COM SIGNAL PATH IC803 V-COM

TC7SH32FU- VCO TE85R VCO R810 C809 R821

VIDEO SIGNAL R806 0 XX 10k COLOR IC803 XX 6.3V CHROMA Y R807 R819 C810 R820BUFFER XX XX 0.1u 100k REC

FB801 C803 0.01u

G FB802 C804 0.01uPB

FB803 C805 0.01u 05 W_MSK

LCD DRIVE

4-49 4-50 PK-55 (2/4) 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 1312345678910 11 123214548 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 COM_ADJ PICTURE COM_BLK_LVL 3.1 Y/CR/XRGB_SW COM_AMP 0.7 AGC_FIL GAMMA2 0.8 AGC_OUT GAMMA0 1.7 BRT_R AGC_LVL SUB_BRT_R 1.1 1.4 BRT_B COLOR SUB_BRT_B 2.2 AMP H_FIL_IN RGB_AMP 2.5 FRPV G/Y FRP 2.4 FRPT R/R-Y/CR COM_FRP B/B-Y/CB OUT_LIM H_FIL VSH REG_OUT VCC2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24,

MVC-FD97 PK-55 (LCD TIMING GENERATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-43 for PK-55 printed wiring board. • See page 4-71 for waveforms.

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16

PK-55 BOARD (3/4) A LCD TIMING GENERATOR(TG BLOCK)

-REF.NO.:2,000 SERIES-

XX MARK:NO MOUNT NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

< >:TYPE S MODEL(REC/PB MODE) ( ):TYPE C MODEL(REC/PB MODE)

B TYPE C

L901 R901 0 10uH 9 PANEL_13.2V PK-55 BOARD (1/4) TYPE SPANEL_-15.3V R936 R944L902 33k 10uH IC902 100kIC902 ±0.5%13.3 NJM062V(TE2) Q903 R912 R916 C909 COM AMP,VCO10k 13.3 2SD2216J-15 680k 0.1u 5.4 1.8 QR(K8).SO R945 C915 C919 PK-55 BOARD (2/4) P_4.9V C911 OUT1 VCC+ C917 R932 22k:TYPE S 0.01u 0.1u 0.1u

C C907 560p 100kTYPE S 2.40.001u OUT2 1.3 0:TYPE CIN1- ±0.5%

L903 0.3 1.3 C914 12 R903 6.8u10uH 0 2.4 IN2- Q902 16V PK-55 BOARD (1/4) PANEL_4.9V R919 IN1+ R9462SB1462J- C916 C918 TYPE C 1M -10.7 0.3 QR(K8).SO 33kQ904 2.2u 2.2uIN2+ VCC- -10.7 2SB1462J- R952QR(K8).SO 0 TYPE C L905 6.8uH R922 L904 68k 0.8 R941 R947 R909 22k 10uH 100k ±0.5% TYPE SXX R929 PANEL_3.2V -10.7 R953 0

D 4700

TYPE S R917 D903 2 1M R920 R923 MA8047- R954 22k R92847k 4700 H-TX PK-55 BOARD (1/4) R911 C906 C908 R933 R935C901 C905 R942 10u 0.1u 120k 0.1u 82p 33k 100k 33k 6.3V R9500 R956 REG_GND TYPEC0C902 CN901 24P D_3.2V 3.3u TG_24 R957 0 20V 24 VSH/CLD TG_23 R958 0 23 VDD/SPD VG TG_22 R959 0 VG 22 VR/CTR

E VB TG_21 R960 0VB C904 0.1u 21 VB/EX3

VR TG_20 R961 0 VR 20 VG/EX287TYPE S 19 VSS/VB12TG_18 18 MODE1/RES R962 0 17 MCLK/TST <4.9>(3.2) 3 <2.4>(1.6) TG_12 V-COM 16 HCNT/VR V-COM 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 LCD901 COM-O R951 COLOR COM-O R904 15 CLT/VG 0 LCD

F VCO 47k TYPE C 14 OE/VB MONITORVCO 9 R949 0R939 13 SRTL/GND

R905 12 SRTR/VSH 47k R9482.9 <2.1>(1.5) TG_24 TYPEC011 VBC/COM

SYNI

17 MCLK/CLD <0.5>(2.6) TG_23 R963 10 VCOM/VGL

SYNC

PK-55 BOARD (2/4) OE/SPD <4.9>(3.2) <2.4>(0.1) TG_22 9 MODE2/VSS WIDE SRT1/CTR TG_17 <0>(0.1) TG_21 8 RESET/MO2 NTSC PDPC SRT2/EX3 TG_16 NTSC NTSC 0 <4.9>(0) TG_20 7 GSRT/MO1 NTPC1 IC901 SRT3/EX2 TG_15

G COMTST <4.9>(0) <3>(3.3) 6 GPCKCOMTST TYPE C TESTI LCD TIMING GENERATOR TESTO TG_14

<4.9>(3.2) <2.5>(0) TG_18 5 GRES/SPS R908 TEST R913 IC901 MODE1/RES TG_13 V_REV 0 100k:TYPE S V_REV 3.2 LZ9GH234:TYPE S <4.9>(0) TG_17 4 VREFL/CLSV_REV VREVC H_REV 82k:TYPE C <4.9>(3.2) CM7018L3-T4:TYPE C RESET/MODE2 R964 <4.9>(0) TG_1603VGL/VCC H_REV TESTI GSRT/MODE1 C903 H_REV 3.2 Note 1:IC901 Pin Name <0>(0.1) TG_15 TYPES2VREFH/VSHHREVC 0.1u:TYPE S GPCK/EX1 0.22u:TYPE C COMTST 0 A/B <4.8>(2.8) TG_14 1 VGHD901 COMTST FRPV A:TYPE C GRES/SPS XX <4.9>(3.2) B:TYPE S <3.9>(0) TG_13 Note 2:CN901 Pin Name FRPV LOWI MODE2/CLS A/B TYPE C R902 A:TYPE C0 TG_12 B:TYPE SH FRPT FRPT R940 P_XHD TYPE C W_MSK12345678910 11 12 <2.4>(1.6) 0 <2.5>(1.6)

I R925 TYPE SHDO * R934

*R925 ±0.5% 0 PANEL_V SIGNAL PATH68k:TYPE S 47k:TYPE C PANEL_COM R927 VIDEO SIGNAL* 10 33k:TYPE S 39k:TYPE C PK-55 BOARD (1/4) CHROMA R977 C912 4700:TYPE S 82p 47k:TYPE C REC MAKER_RECOG

J PB HSY LCD TIMING GENERATOR PK-55 (3/4) 4-51 4-52 VCO

D902 1T369-01-T8A 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 R921 68k BLKI P16 <2.5>(1.6) BLKO VSEPC R927 * ±0.5% <4.6>(3) BGPO P15 <4.5>(3.1) <4.9>(3.2) 4321HSY MUT <2.4>(1.6) VSY PDP VIN GND <4.9>(3.2) GND VDD <4.9>(3.2) SYNO TST25678R931 0 <4.9>(3.2) WIDOV TST1 TYPE C <2.4>(1.7)WIDOT OSCI FRPV <2.5>(1.6) Q901 FRPV OSCO 2SD2216J- FRPT QR(K8).SO HCNT/FRPT TESTO 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 COM-O PANEL_COM C9131u V-COM R966 100k R967 0 R968 0 R969 0 TYPE S R970 0 TYPE C R971 47 VG R972 47 VB R973 47 VR R974 47 R975 47 R976 47,

MVC-FD97 PK-55 (BACK LIGHT DRIVE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-43 for PK-55 printed wiring board. • See page 4-71 for waveforms.

12345678910 11 12 13

PK-55 BOARD (4/4) A BACK LIGHT DRIVE(BL BLOCK)

-REF.NO.:2,000 SERIES- Q856

XX MARK:NO MOUNT FP102-TL

Q854 SWITCHING L853NO MARK:REC/PB MODE L852 R867 T851 ND801 L851 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO 22uH 100uH 1800 CN851 10P BACK 4.7uH SWITCHING 3 5.3 LIGHT8.24510 BL_HIGHBL_UNREG 8.2 7.7 2 C866 R856 R857 5 R868 12p 9 N.C 560 22k 1 1800 3000V 8 N.C 7.8267N.C

B 6 N.C

C864 3 7.7 0.015u5.1 5 N.C C852 5.1 11 22u C856 R858 C85945410 4 N.C 16V 18p 560 27p PK-55 BOARD (1/4) C853 -0.60.22u C86113BL_LOW33u C862 1u 10V Q860 -0.6 2 BL_LED FP216-TL 2 INVERTER DRIVE 1 BL_CASE BL_GND Q852

C D852 Q861UN9112J-(K8).SO R860 C860 XX UN9112J-(K8).SO

SWITCH 10k XX LED SWITCH R873±0.5% 4.9 4.9 4.9 0 120 PANEL_4.9V R855 120k ±0.5% 4.9 LND851 C858 R859 SHIELD_GND 0 10 IC851 0.01u 47004 1

D LND852 DC/DC CONTROL R869R861 R864 100k

SHIELD_GND Q8511234C857 1800 47k UN9214J- 0.022u ±0.5% LND853 (K8).SO

SWITCH

SHIELD_GND 2.1 LND854 SHIELD_GND C851 0.01u Q857-859 BL LEVEL IC852 LND855 CURRENT DETECT

E SHIELD_GND IC852Q857 NJM2406F-TE2 D853

87652SD2216J- 1 4.9 1.7 MA111-(K8).S0QR(K8).SO Q853 0.9 UN9213J-(K8).SO 0.9 C863 PROTECT SWITCH 0.6 4.9 0.3 0.1u 0 0.3 0.3 0 R871 R854 R862C854 2.5 0 R863 R865 R8663300 Q859 22k C865 R87227k 2.2u 1500 1500 R874 ±0.5% ±0.5% 4700 0.1u 470 6.3V UN9213J-(K8).SO XX

F R853 C855 Q855 Q858 R8706800 2.2u UN9213J-(K8).SO 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO 6800

±0.5% SWITCH PK-55 BOARD (2/4) BL_LEV

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont

line with mark 0 are critical for safety. critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que

Replace only with part number specified. par une piéce portant le numéro spécifié. BACK LIGHT DRIVE

4-53 4-54 PK-55 (4/4) IC851 TL5001CD-E2 GND OUT 0.9 4.9 RT VCC 2.3 1.2 DTC FB SCP IN54123D854 PG1112H-TR,

MVC-FD97

VF-143 (LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, EVF LCD, BACK LIGHT) PRINTED WIRING BOARD – Ref. No.: VF-143 board; 2,000 series – • For Printed Wiring Board. • VF-143 board is six-layer print board. However, the patterns of layers 2 to 5 have not been included in the diagram. • There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram. • See page 4-77 for printed parts location. • Chip transistor54

C

13BE751411343213110 6

K

45A561234564134-55

LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, EVF LCD, BACK LIGHT

VF-143 4-56,

MVC-FD97 VF-143 (LCD DRIVE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-55 for VF-143 printed wiring board. • See page 4-72 for waveforms.

12345678910 11 12 13 14

VF-143 BOARD(1/2) A LCD DRIVER(VF1 BLOCK)

R517 SHA -REF.NO.:2,000 SERIES- 39k SHR SHA

XX MARK:NO MOUNT SHR

R511 R513 R516 R518 R520 R525 R527

SHB NO MARK:REC/PB MODE XX 68k 39k 68k XX XX47k SHG SHB R :REC MODE SHG 1FRP P :PB MODE VF-143 BOARD (2/2)R512 R514 R519 R521 FRP

XX 33k 33k 39k XHD R528 XX XVD

XHD

R503

B Q501 10 XVD

D501 R507 SBLK CPT-182S-C-TSL-BCD 1/8W CL-200IR-X-TSL-BCD 22k 3216 C518 SBLKEYE SENSOR (EYE SENSOR LED) C506 0.01u 0.1u B 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 C5172.2u R508 6 20V 33k TA A 2R509 XX R526 100 EVF_12.0V VF-143 BOARD (2/2) R533 7.3Q502 N.C. B OUT18k B 2SC5376F-B(TPL3) 1.8 C514N.C. C502 C505 0.67BDC DET 4.7u7.3 R523 100 B 3C 0.01u DETECT 4.7u IC501XX BRIGHT G OUT G VF-143 BOARD (2/2)B 10V 1.4 1.8 C515 B CONTRAST G DC DET 4.7u R A_OUT VCC IC502 5 7.3 R524 100 BN.C. R OUT COM 1.8 C516A_IN SUB CONT B LCD DRIVER R DC DET 4.7u C501 R504 (-) B_OUT B IC503 EVR L501 10u SUB CONT R IC502 GND1 (D/A CONVERTER) 10uH 6.3V 2.0 680k A_IN B_IN 3.0 CXA8115AR-T4 4 C519 C504 (+) (-) 0.01u R531 VCC1 GND2 2.2u IC503 0 SHA 0.8B_IN 7.0 F M62376GP-65AD L504 GND SHA BUF OUT 10uH C520 (+) SHB 3.0 1 7.0 R530 0.01u 2 39k BRT 0.7 BSHB BUF IN BRT GND SHG 0.8C503 CLR 1.2 3.0D 10u C522 SHG EXT BGP COLOR VDD_AXX IC504 SHR 0.8 2.7 XCS16V SBR 2.1 TA TA75S01F(TE85R) SHR N.C. C513 SUB_BRT_R XCS CN501 27P R505 4.7u SBB 1.3 3.2 L502 3216 SUB_BRT_B SO SENSOR_GND 1 10uH IN(+) 56 B SI C521 2.0 VCC 3.1 1/10W C507 CONT 1.4 2.5 47u CONTRAST SI 10u SENSOR_GND 2 VEE 6.3V R522 XSCKR529 B_LIMIT 0.9 6.3V TAB12345678910 11 12 1M XX BLACK_LIMIT XSCK EVF_SENS 3 IC504 IN(-)2.0 OUT GAM 1.0 2.81.6 GAMMA_1 XLOOK_ON BL_UNREG 4 CLR 1.5 0 DETECT VCO ADJ ADJ EVF_LED_ON 5 AGCC508 2.3040.01u L503 R515 INV_CURRENT XNTSC XNTSC SENSOR_GND 6 C509

E B 22uH

C512 XHD XX XX 0 VF-143 BOARD (2/2) 0.01u LOOK_LEVEL WIDE WIDE EVF_XHD7BC5100.01uB3PIC 0 3.1 B C511 PICTURE VCC_D VCOEVF_B-Y 8 0.01u AGC 0AGC_LEVEL VDD EVF_Y9BEVF_R-Y 10 VXO XVD VF-143 BOARD (2/2) EVF_XVD 11 INV_CURRENT GND 12 EVF_GND FC-85 BOARD (12/12) GND 13 CN802 D_3.2V 14

F THROUGH THEFP-173 FLEXIBLE EVF_3.1V 15 EVF_3.1V 6

(SEE PAGE 4-37) R506EVF_3.1V 16 VF-143 BOARD (2/2)XX EVF_12.0V 17 Q504

XX

EVF_12.0V 18 EVF_BL_4.75V EVF_VG 19 EVF_BL_GND R510 0 VCO 20 EVF_BL_4.75V 21

SIGNAL PATH

EVF_BL_4.75V 22 EVF_BL_GND 23

VIDEO SIGNAL G EVF_BL_GND 24 XCS

XCS_EVF_EVR 25 CHROMA Y

SI

DATA_FROM_HI 26

XSCK

XHI_SCK 27 REC

PB LCD DRIVE

4-57 4-58 VF-143 (1/2) 3.1 R534 22k R502 22k R501 22k 1.9 R532 0 1.9 1.643213214556780.3 Q503 2SD1622-ST-TD LED DRIVE 0.2 7.8

CONT BRT PIC

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37

GAM

PICTURE N.C. XRGB N.C. 3.0 AGC FILTER GAMMA2 1.0 1.2AGC OUT GAMMA1 SBR 1.0 AGC LEVEL SUB BRTR02.0 COLOR SUB BRT B SBB 1.2 1.8N.C. WHITE LIMIT 1.7 G/Y FRP 2.0 1.5R/R-Y/Cr RGB BLK 2.0 0B/B-Y/Cb BLACK LIMIT 2.0 0.9N.C. VREF 7.3 N.C. VCC2 14.6 FRP

SBLK

B_LIMIT 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

XHD

12 11 1098765432113 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3.0,

MVC-FD97

VF-143 (TIMING GENERATOR, EVF LCD, BACK LIGHT) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-55 for VF-143 printed wiring board. • See page 4-72 for waveforms. 12345678910 11 12 13 14

VF-143 BOARD(2/2) A TIMING GENERATOR,EVF LCD,BACK LIGHT

(VF2 BLOCK) -REF.NO.:2,000 SERIES- XX MARK:NO MOUNT NO MARK:REC/PB MODE R :REC MODE P :PB MODE T601 C625 0.01u R636 L605 1 10

B BEVF_GND 33k 10uH

EVF_BL_4.75V 2 L604 Q605 1 47uH FX216-TL1 1 SWITCHING 2 VF-143 BOARD (1/2) 1.3 63 ND601 EVF_BL_GND 5 C626 EVF_3.1V R628 D603 47u 1k

C CL-170PG-CD-T

10V5624.9 4.1 TA C630(STARTER) C 2200p VF-143 BOARD (1/2) EVF_12.0V 630V L601 Q60463C628 220uH XP4501-TXE 3225 LED DRIVE 0 4.7u25FLND601 0.414BACK_GND0 Q602 1 LND602R626 R629 R630 R637 UN9113J-(K8).SO 10k 470 22k 10023BACK_GNDSW D604

D XVD IC604 1SS370(TE85L)4.9XVD

SHA R638 NORSHA 0 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 SHR 0 CN601 16P SHR C629 1 SHB C627 XX 2.2u 1 EVF_12.0V SHB 4.8 F VF-143 BOARD (1/2) SHG 2 EVF_GND SHG 3.0 D601 C618 FRP MA6S121-(TX) 3300p R627 3 VST FRP16B1kXHD R611091.5 4 VCK XHD 22k C6192 5 C616 R621SBLK 100p SLYT HCK1 4.7u 10k 1.5 5 STB SBLK CH HP4 HCK2

E ADJ R607 C612 3

4 B 47k 1u 1.606ENBADJ B RPD HST1 XNTSC C608 7 DWN 4 XNTSC 0.1u VSS IC603 VCK1WIDE L603 1.2 R614 10 1.5 8 RGT EVF LCD VF-143 BOARD (1/2) WIDE C605 3.9uH CKO LCD902LCD TIMING GENERATOR VCK287656.8u R604 470k R624 1.4 3.0 9 HST 20V 47k C613 R620 33k CKI IC603 VDD VCO B ±0.5% 0.01u 1MB 3.0 CXD2458AR-T4 0 10 HCK2VCO TA VDD VST C620 3.0 11 HCK1 0.001u TST4 ENR608 R615 2.9 0.2 12 BLK 56k B 1127k C617 XVD CLR 5 0.01u123413 BINV_CURRENT B HP1 STBY

F VF-143 BOARD (1/2) D6021T369-01-T8A 0.2 14 RVXO HP2 HST2 IC604

TC7W02FU(TE12R) 15 G R602 R619 HP3 SLFRR622 180k XX 16 COMR616 56k ±0.5% 150k C610 0.022u8BL602 R63112345678910 11 12 47uH XX

G

C621 C622 C623 10u 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 0.01u 0.33u6.3VBFGND VCC2 CB

OUT IC601 IC602

TA75S558F(TE85R) DC/AC CONVERTER 14.6 9.154

H R617 R625

VCC 2.5V OSC SCP 270k 100k123123456782.9 2.9 R618 R623 33k 47k C604 C601 0.1u 0.22u R610B C614 B 1200 150p

CH I C6111.2 0.022u R612 IC602B 330k

AMP SIGNAL PATH 1.2 R606 R609 270k 10k VIDEO SIGNAL Q601 RN2105-TE85L C602 C603 R601 R603 C606 C609 R613 DISCHARGE C6150.01u 10u CHROMA SW 68k 56k 2200p 4.7u 180k 0.01u B 6.3VBBBBREC

R J VF-143 BOARD (1/2) G PB COM

05 The components identified by mark 0 or dotted Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont line with mark 0 are critical for safety. critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que 4-59 Replace only with part number specified. par une piéce portant le numéro spécifié.

TIMING GENERATOR, EVF LCD, BACK LIGHT

VF-143 (2/2) 4-60 Q603 UN9213J-(K8).SO 4.8 SW 2.5 1.3 0.6 14.6 0.1 14.6 C607 XX 1.2 0.5 R605 2.5 0.4 68k 1.8 0.7 2.5 0.7 IC601 MB3789PFV-G-BND-ER

HD VCO XVD ADJ

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 024/027 HD XNTSC 0 HD PAL/NTSC XCLP 0 2.9 SHA XCLR SH3 WIDE 3.0 0.8 SHR 16:9/4:3 SH2 SBLK 0 0.8 SHB SBLK SH1 0 3.0 VSS VSS

SHG

TST0 SH4 0.8 TST1 FLDO

FRP

TST2 FRP 1.5 XHD RGT XHD 0 2.7 LCX027/009 LCX024/005 3.0 3.0 BLK VD 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 C624 0.33u

F

1A 3.0 1Y 1B 2.8 2B 2Y 3.0 4.8 2A 3.0,

MVC-FD97 MA-404 (MIC AMP) PRINTED WIRING BOARD AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

– Ref. No.: MA-404 board; 2,000 series – 1234567• For Printed Wiring Board. • MA-404 board is four-layer print board. However, the patterns MA-404 BOARD of layers 2 to 3 have not been included in the diagram. A MIC AMP • There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model CONTROL SWITCH is printed on this diagram.. -REF.NO.:2,000 SERIES- XX MARK:NO MOUNT BLOCK NO MARK:REC/PB MODE RV001 T

ZOOM B W

2 4 AE-25 BOARD CN351 THROUGH THE FP-174 FLEXIBLE13(SEE PAGE 4-64) S001

C (SHUTTER) D

C302 R302 R304 C301 1200 CN305 2P MIC901XX 180 XX C304 1 MIC SIG 0.1u MIC

E 2 MIC GNDC307

33u 4V R301 R303 C303 100 1u 2.31234

F

CN301 10P C306 IC301 KEY_AD4 10 0.1u MIC AMP REG_GND 9 IC301 NJM2118V-TE2 XRS_ON1 8 FC-85 BOARD (9/12) CN402 XRS_ON2 7 SIGNAL PATH THROUGH THE ZOOM_SW_AD 6 FP-171 FLEXIBLE D_3.2V58765(SEE PAGE 4-31) AUDIO

G MIC_GND 4 4.9 1.3 SIGNAL

MIC_SIG 3 C305 MIC_GND 2 L301 1u10uH REC A_4.9V 1

MIC AMP

4-61 4-62 MA-404 CN306 5P 5 KEY_AD4 4 KEY_AD4 3 N.C 2 REG_GND 1 REG_GND CN303 6P 6 XRS_ON1 5 XRS_ON2 4 UNREG_GND 3 D_3.2V 2 ZOOM_SW_AD V+ MIC V+1.3 0.6 1 UNREG_GND AMP OUT EXT MIC V+ 1.3 1.3 AMP NFB +VIN -VIN GND,

MVC-FD97 AE-25 (CONTROL SWITCH) PRINTED WIRING BOARD AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

– Ref. No.: AE-25 board; 2,000 series – 1234• For Printed Wiring Board. • AE-25 board is four-layer print board. However, the patterns S351 of layers 2 to 3 have not been included in the diagram. SPOT METER • There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram. AE-25 BOARD • See page 4-77 for printed parts location. A CONTROL SWITCH R351 -REF.NO.:2,000 SERIES- 33k S352

XX MARK:NO MOUNT

ONE-PUSH WHITE BALANCE R352

B 6800 S353

WHITE BALANCE R353 4700 S354 PROGRAM AE

C R354

2700 S355 PROGRAM AE (-) R355 S356 PROGRAM AE

D (+)

CN351 5P KEY_AD4 1 MA-404 BOARD CN306 KEY_AD4 2 THROUGH THE N.C 3 FP-174 FLEXIBLE REG_GND 4 (SEE PAGE 4-62) REG_GND 5 D351

XX E LND351

FRAME_GND LND352 SPOT FRAME_GND METER 05 ONE-PUSH WHITE BLANCE WHITE

BALANCE

PROGRAM AE(–) PROGRAM AE(+)

PROGRAM AE CONTROL SWITCH

AE-25 4-63 4-64,

MVC-FD97 CF-83 (CONTROL SWITCH) PRINTED WIRING BOARD AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

– Ref. No.: CF-83 board; 2,000 series – 12345• For Printed Wiring Board. • CF-83 board is four-layer print board. However, the patterns of layers 2 to 3 have not been included in the diagram. • There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model CF-83 BOARD is printed on this diagram.. A CONTROL SWITCH -REF.NO.:2,000 SERIES-

XX MARK:NO MOUNT

R401 33k12346

B

5 7 S402 S401

FOCUS MACRO

AUTO MANUAL CN401 6P 1 KEY_AD0 2 REG_GND FC-85 BOARD (9/12) 1233D_3.2V/KEY_AD3 CN401 THROUGH THE464FOCUS_A FP-172 FLEXIBLE

C55FOCUS_B7 (SEE PAGE 4-32)

6 REG_GND S403 STEADY D402 D401 SHOT XX XX ON OFF LND401 FDD_REG_GND LND402 FDD_REG_GND

D

CN402 XX NC 1 NC 2 GND 3 FOCUS_A 4 FOCUS_B 5 D3.2V 6

E

STEADY FOCUS

SHOT

AUTO 05 ONrrMANUAL OFF MACRO

CONTROL SWITCH

4-65 4-66 CF-83,

MVC-FD97 FU-153 (DC IN) PRINTED WIRING BOARD AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

– Ref. No.: FU-153 board; 2,000 series – 123456789• For Printed Wiring Board. • FU-153 board is four-layer print board. However, the patterns of layers 2 to 3 have not been included in the diagram. • There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model A FU-153 BOARD is printed on this diagram. DC IN • See page 4-77 for printed parts location. -REF.NO.2,000 SERIES- • Chip transistor XX MARK:NO MOUNT NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

C B

Q002,003,005 CN003 CHARGE CONTROL 5P

B E C002 1 BATT_SIGXX FC-85 BOARD (9/12)

J001 CN001 2 BATT/XEXT CN002 DC IN 3P LF001 3 FAST_CHARGE_ON THROUGH THE ACV_UNREG 1 FU-054 HARNESS R020 4 INIT_CHARGE_ON ACV_GND 2 10 R004 (SEE PAGE 4-31)1k 5 DC_PACK_SW

C BATT/XEXT 3 FB001 C003 R001 8.2

XX 1k Q001 7.6 SI4963DY-T1

SWITCH

R009 7.8 Q002 LND001 XX R0082G2SB1122-0 R002 ST-TD 470k 8.2 R005 R019STATIC_GND S 6800 47k D00381CN004 LND002 MAZT082H08S0 8 Q003 12P7DKKUN9213J-STATIC_GND 6 (K8).SO5 0.1 12 REG_GND

D D006 3 DBT901 XX S

BATTERY 8 1.8 11 REG_GND A TERMINAL 4 10 REG_GND

G

A CN002 F004 7.8 9 REG_GND 4P D004 D001 1.4A/32V MA8120-TX XX 8 BATT_UNREG FC-85 BOARD (11/12) BATT_UNREG1KKFB002S D002 F003 CN001 BATT_SIG 2 1.4A/32V 7 UNREG4 C001 1SS357-TPH3 THROUGH THE K 0.022u 6 UNREG4BATT_GND 3 FU-053 HARNESSF002 K DC_PACK_SW 4 1.4A/32V 5 UNREG3 (SEE PAGE 4-35) A FB003 7.8 1.8 4 UNREG3R006

E 0 1M 0 F0011.4A/32V 3 UNREG2R021

0 2 UNREG2 1 UNREG1 Q004 Q005 SSM3K03FE(TPL3) F005SSM3K03FE(TPL3) 1.4A/32V 05 SWITCH5481

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont

line with mark 0 are critical for safety. critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que

Replace only with part number specified. par une piéce portant le numéro spécifié. DC IN FU-153 4-67 4-68

8.2, 4-3. WAVEFORMS

CD-311 BOARD

8.0 Vp-p 104 µsec IC101 1, 2, 3 REC 8.0 Vp-p 104 µsec IC101 4, 5, 6 REC 1.0 Vp-p 104 µsec IC101 8 REC 5.0 Vp-p 18.4 MHz IC101 qf REC 5.0 Vp-p 17.1 MHz IC101 qg REC 4.2 Vp-p 17.1 MHz IC101 qh REC 4-69, VP-55 BOARD PK-55 BOARD11q; 2.8 Vp-p 500 mVp-p 6.0 Vp-p 12 MHz 480 MHz

H

IC209 wf REC IC802 8 REC/PB IC851 1 REC/PB 300 mVp-p

H

IC802 9 REC/PB 250 mVp-p

H

IC802 0 REC/PB 4.6 Vp-p 2H IC802 w; REC/PB 4.6 Vp-p 2H IC802 ws REC/PB 4.6 Vp-p 2H IC802 wf REC/PB 4.8 Vp-p 11.7 MHz IC901 REC/PB 3.0 Vp-p

V

IC901 ef REC/PB 3.0 Vp-p

H

IC904 ej REC/PB 4-701, VF-143 BOARD 1 q; 480 mVp-p 2.2 Vp-p 16.5 MHz

H

IC502 8 REC/PB IC603 ra REC/PB 2 qa 300 mVp-p 3.0 Vp-pHVIC502 9 REC/PB IC603 rg REC/PB 200 mVp-p

H

IC502 0 REC/PB 8.8 Vp-p 2H IC502 w; REC/PB 8.8 Vp-p 2H IC502 ws REC/PB 8.8 Vp-p 2H IC502 wf REC/PB 3.0 Vp-p 2H IC502 wl REC/PB 1.5 Vp-p 68 µsec IC601 qg REC/PB 3.0 Vp-p

H

IC603 wj REC/PB 4-712, 4-4. PARTS LOCATION CD-311 BOARD CD-311 BOARD (SIDE A) (SIDE B) C160 C-1 C101 A-3 C161 C-2 C102 B-2 C165 B-1 C103 A-1 C104 A-2 L150 B-1 C105 A-1 C106 A-2 R112 A-1 C107 B-2 C108 A-2 C109 B-3 C150 C-3 C151 C-2 C152 C-2 C153 C-2 C156 C-2 C157 C-3 C158 C-3 C159 C-3 C162 B-2 C163 B-3 C164 B-3 CN101 A-1 CN102 B-1 IC101 B-2 IC150 C-3 L101 B-2 Q101 A-2 Q102 B-2 R101 B-1 R102 A-1 R103 A-1 R104 A-1 R105 A-2 R106 A-2 R107 A-2 R108 B-3 R109 B-3 R110 A-2 R150 C-3 R151 C-2 R152 C-2 R153 C-3 R154 C-2 R155 B-2 R156 C-2 R157 B-3 R158 B-3 R159 B-2 R160 B-3 SE150 C-2 SE151 C-2 4-723, VP-55 BOARD VP-55 BOARD PK-55 BOARD PK-55 BOARD (SIDE A) (SIDE B) (SIDE A) (SIDE B) C205 A-1 C201 A-2 BT701 B-2 R956 E-7 C803 D-4 R862 D-3 C207 A-1 C202 A-2 R957 D-6 C804 D-4 R863 D-3 C212 B-1 C203 A-3 C705 A-2 R961 D-6 C805 D-4 R865 D-3 C224 A-3 C204 A-2 C706 A-2 R962 D-6 C806 E-4 R866 D-3 C225 A-4 C206 B-3 C710 B-3 R974 C-6 C807 E-4 R873 C-3 C226 B-3 C208 B-2 C711 B-3 R976 C-6 C808 D-4 R902 D-6 C227 A-3 C209 B-3 C801 D-6 C810 D-4 R904 E-6 C228 A-3 C210 B-2 C802 D-6 S707 F-6 C812 E-5 R905 E-6 C229 B-3 C211 A-3 C811 D-5 S709 F-7 C813 E-4 R911 F-6 C230 B-3 C213 A-1 C814 E-4 C852 E-3 R912 F-6 C235 B-4 C214 B-2 C815 D-5 SE701 A-3 C853 E-4 R913 E-6 C236 A-4 C215 B-2 C816 D-5 C854 D-2 R916 F-6 C231 A-5 C851 E-3 T851 D-2 C856 E-3 R917 F-6 CN234 A-2 C232 A-4 C855 E-3 C857 D-3 R919 F-6 C233 A-4 C861 E-2 C858 D-3 R920 E-7 D201 B-5 C234 A-4 C863 D-3 C859 E-3 R921 F-6 C237 B-3 C865 D-3 C862 E-3 R922 F-7 FB261 A-5 C238 A-3 C866 C-2 C864 E-2 R923 E-7 FB262 A-5 C901 D-6 C903 D-6 R925 D-6 CN231 A-2 C902 D-7 C904 E-6 R927 D-6 IC203 A-1 CN232 A-5 C913 F-7 C905 D-7 R928 E-7 IC204 A-2 CN235 A-1 C914 E-7 C906 F-6 R929 F-7 IC205 A-3 CN236 B-5 C919 D-6 C907 F-6 R931 D-6 IC206 B-3 C908 E-7 R932 F-7 IC207 B-3 FB201 A-3 CN701 D-5 C909 F-6 R933 E-7 IC209 B-4 FB260 A-5 CN702 D-7 C911 F-6 R934 D-7 FB263 A-5 CN781 E-5 C912 D-6 R939 E-7 Q201 A-1 FB264 A-5 CN851 C-3 C915 C-6 R944 C-6 Q202 A-1 CN901 C-7 C916 D-7 R945 C-6 Q205 A-5 IC201 A-3 C917 C-6 R952 D-7 Q206 A-5 IC202 A-2 D784 E-4 C918 D-7 R953 D-7 Q207 A-5 IC208 A-4 D786 C-1 R954 D-7 Q208 B-5 IC210 A-4 D787 C-1 D701 B-2 R958 D-6 Q209 B-5 D788 B-1 D702 A-3 R959 D-6 Q210 B-5 L201 A-3 D853 D-3 D703 A-3 R960 D-6 Q211 A-5 L202 A-1 D782 F-5 R963 C-7 L204 A-5 FB781 F-5 D783 F-5 R964 C-7 R216 A-1 L205 A-5 FB786 E-4 D785 C-1 R966 C-6 R220 A-2 L206 A-3 D789 F-5 R967 C-7 R221 B-1 L207 B-3 IC702 A-3 D790 F-4 R968 C-6 R222 A-1 IC801 E-6 D854 C-3 R969 C-6 R256 A-4 Q203 A-2 IC803 D-4 D902 E-6 R970 D-6 R257 A-4 Q204 B-1 IC851 D-3 D903 D-7 R971 C-6 R228 B-2 IC852 D-3 R972 D-6 R231 A-3 R201 A-2 FB782 E-5 R973 C-6 R232 B-2 R202 A-1 L702 B-3 FB783 E-5 R975 D-6 R233 A-3 R203 B-3 L801 D-4 FB784 E-5 R977 D-5 R234 A-2 R204 A-2 L852 E-3 FB785 E-4 R235 A-3 R205 A-3 L853 E-2 FB787 C-1 S701 A-7 R238 A-3 R206 B-3 L901 C-7 FB788 C-2 S702 A-6 R239 A-3 R207 A-3 L902 D-5 FB789 C-2 S703 A-5 R240 A-3 R209 B-3 L903 D-5 FB790 C-2 S704 D-1 R241 B-3 R210 A-2 L904 D-6 FB791 C-2 S705 A-2 R242 B-3 R211 B-3 FB801 D-4 S706 C-1 R243 A-2 R212 A-1 Q851 D-3 FB802 D-4 S708 D-1 R244 B-3 R213 B-3 Q852 D-3 FB803 D-4 R245 A-5 R214 B-2 Q853 E-3 R246 A-5 R215 B-2 Q901 F-1 IC802 D-4 R247 A-5 R217 B-2 Q902 E-7 IC901 E-6 R248 B-5 R218 B-2 Q903 E-7 IC902 F-7 R249 B-5 R219 A-1 Q904 E-7 R250 B-5 R223 B-1 J781 B-1 R251 B-5 R224 B-2 R703 A-3 R252 B-3 R225 A-2 R713 B-3 L802 E-5 R253 B-3 R227 B-2 R715 B-3 L851 E-4 R254 A-4 R724 F-6 L905 E-6 R255 B-4 R808 E-4 R258 B-5 R809 E-4 Q854 E-3 R259 B-5 R810 D-4 Q855 D-3 R812 E-4 Q856 E-3 X201 B-4 R813 E-4 Q857 D-3 R814 E-4 Q858 D-3 R817 E-4 Q859 D-3 R818 E-4 Q860 E-3 R821 E-4 Q861 D-3 R853 E-3 R854 E-3 R708 B-2 R864 E-3 R712 A-3 R867 E-2 R714 A-3 R868 E-2 R716 A-6 R869 D-3 R717 A-6 R870 D-3 R718 A-6 R871 D-3 R719 A-6 R872 C-3 R720 C-1 R901 D-6 R721 A-2 R903 D-6 R722 D-1 R908 D-6 R723 D-1 R935 E-7 R727 B-3 R936 E-7 R782 C-2 R940 D-6 R787 C-1 R941 F-7 R820 D-5 R942 F-7 R855 D-3 R946 D-7 R856 E-3 R947 D-7 R857 E-3 R948 D-7 R858 E-3 R949 C-6 R859 D-3 R950 D-7 R860 D-3 R951 C-6 R861 D-3 4-736, VF-143 BOARD VF-143 BOARD AE-25 BOARD FU-153 BOARD FU-153 BOARD (SIDE A) (SIDE B) (SIDE B) (SIDE A) (SIDE B) C501 B-3 C520 B-4 CN351 C-3 CN001 C-2 C001 B-1 C502 A-3 C521 B-3 CN002 B-2 C503 B-5 C601 B-3 R351 C-3 CN003 A-2 CN004 B-2 C504 A-5 C602 B-4 R352 B-2 C505 A-4 C603 B-4 R353 A-3 FB001 C-2 D001 B-1 C506 B-3 C604 B-4 R354 A-1 FB002 B-2 D002 B-2 C507 C-3 C605 B-4 R355 A-2 FB003 B-2 D003 A-2 C508 B-3 C606 B-3 C510 C-4 C608 A-4 S351 C-3 LF001 C-1 F001 A-2 C511 C-4 C609 A-4 S352 B-2 F002 B-2 C512 C-4 C610 A-4 S353 B-3 Q003 B-2 F003 B-2 C513 B-5 C611 A-4 S354 A-3 Q005 A-2 F004 B-2 C514 B-4 C612 A-5 S355 A-1 F005 A-2 C515 B-5 C613 A-4 S356 A-2 R001 A-2 C516 B-5 C614 B-4 R005 B-2 Q001 C-1 C517 B-5 C615 A-3 R008 A-1 Q002 C-2 C518 B-4 C625 B-6 R019 B-2 Q004 B-1 C519 C-4 C626 B-6 R021 B-2 C616 C-2 C628 B-6 R002 B-1 C617 B-2 C629 C-2 R004 C-2 C618 C-2 C630 B-6 R006 B-1 C619 C-2 R020 C-2 C620 C-2 CN601 C-2 C621 C-1 C622 C-1 D601 B-5 C623 C-1 D604 C-6 C624 C-2 IC503 B-4 CN501 C-4 IC601 A-4 IC602 C-2 D501 A-4 IC604 C-2 D602 B-1 D603 C-6 L504 B-4 L601 C-4 IC502 B-4 L604 B-6 IC504 A-4 L605 B-7 IC603 C-2 Q601 B-3 L501 B-3 Q602 B-4 L502 B-5 Q603 B-4 L503 C-4 Q604 B-4 L602 B-1 Q605 B-6 L603 C-2 R532 C-3 ND601 B-6 R510 C-3 R601 B-3 Q501 A-4 R602 A-4 Q502 A-4 R603 B-3 Q503 A-4 R604 A-4 R605 A-5 R501 A-3 R606 A-4 R502 A-3 R607 A-5 R503 A-4 R608 A-4 R504 A-4 R609 A-4 R505 A-4 R610 A-4 R507 B-3 R611 B-5 R508 B-3 R612 A-3 R513 B-4 R613 A-3 R514 B-4 R614 B-5 R516 B-4 R615 A-5 R517 B-4 R616 A-5 R518 B-4 R617 C-2 R519 B-4 R618 C-2 R520 B-4 R623 C-2 R521 B-4 R625 C-2 R522 C-4 R626 B-4 R523 B-4 R628 B-5 R524 B-4 R629 B-4 R526 B-4 R630 B-5 R530 B-4 R636 B-6 R531 A-5 R637 B-6 R533 A-3 R638 C-2 R534 B-4 R620 B-2 T601 B-7 R621 C-2 R622 B-2 R624 C-1 R627 C-2 44-7-74 E,

MVC-FD97 SECTION 5 ADJUSTMENTS Before starting adjustment EVR Data Re-writing Procedure When Replacing Board

The data that is stored in the repair board, is not necessarily correct. Perform either procedure 1 or procedure 2 or procedure 3 when replacing board. Procedure 1 Save the EVR data of the machine in which a board is going to be replaced. Download the saved data after a board is replaced. (Machine before starting repair) PC PC (Machine after a board is replaced) Save the EVR data Download the saved to a personal computer. data to a machine. Procedure 2 Remove the EEPROM from the board of the machine that is going to be repaired. Install the removed EEPROM to the replaced board. Remove the EEPROM and install it. (Former board) (New board) Procedure 3 When the data cannot be saved due to defective EEPROM, or when the EEPROM cannot be removed or in- stalled, save the data from the same model of the same destination, and download it. (Machine to be repaired) PC (Machine to be repaired) Download the data. Save the data. (The same model of the same destination) After the EVR data is saved and downloaded, check the respective items of the EVR data. (Refer to page 5-2 for the items to be checked.) 5-1, 1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards

When replacing main parts and boards, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.

Replaced parts Block Mounted parts Board replacement replacement replacement Adjustment section Adjustment Initialization of Initialization of D page datazz7, B, D, E, F, page data Initialization of 7, B, E, F page datazzVideo Video sync level adj. zzzzzVideo burst level adj. zzzzzCamera Hall adj. zzzzzFlange back adj. zzzzFNo. standard data inputzzzzMechanical shutter adjustmentzzzzLight level adj. zzzzzAuto white balance standard data inputzzzzzWhite balance ND filter compensationzzzzzAuto white balance adj. zzzzzColor reproduction adj. zzzzzStrobe white balance adj. zzzzzzCCD (black and white) defect compensationzzzSteady shot adj. z z COLOR EVF EVF initial data inputzzzVCO adj. (NTSC) zzzzVCO adj. (PAL) zzzzBright adj. (NTSC) zzzBright adj. (PAL) zzzContrast adj. (NTSC) zzzContrast adj. (PAL) zzzBacklight consumption current adj. zzzWhite balance adj. zzzzzLCD LCD initial data inputzzzVCO adj. (NTSC) zzzzzVCO adj. (PAL) zzzzzBlack limit adj. zzzzzBright adj. zzzzzContrast adj. zzzzzColor adj. zzzzzVG center adj. zzzzzV-COM adj. zzzzzzWhite balance adj. zzzzzzzSystem control Battery down adj. zzzZoom center adj. zzzEye sensor adj. zzzAlignment check (FDD unit) z z

Table 5-1-1

5-2 Lens device Flash unit LCD block LCD901 (LCD panel) LCD EVF block LCD902 (LCD panel) LCD block ND9001 (Back light unit) Control switch block FDD unit CD-311 board IC201 (CCD imager) CD-311 board SE150/151 (YAW, PITCH sensor) VF-143 board IC502 (LCD drive) VF-143 board IC603 (LCD Timing generator) VF-143 board ND601 (Back light unit) VF-143 board IC503 (EVR) FC-85 board IC102 (S/H, AGC, A/D) FC-85 board IC186 (EVR) FC-85 board IC301 (CAMERA DSP) FC-85 board IC901 (VIDEO AMP) PK-55 board IC901 (LCD drive) PK-55 board IC904 (LCD Timing generator) PK-55 board IC902 (EVR) FC-85 board (COMPLETE) VF-141 board (COMPLETE) VP-55 board (COMPLETE) PK-55 board (COMPLETE) FC-85 board IC508 EEPROM FC-85 board IC406 EEPROM, 5-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENTS 1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT 1-1-1. List of service tools • Oscilloscope • Regulated power supply • AC power adaptor (AC-L10A) • Digital voltmeter • Vectorscope • Color monitor Ref. No. Name Parts Code Usage J-1 Filter for color temperature correction (C14) J-6080-058-A Auto white balance adjustment/check White balance adjustment/check J-2 Pattern box PTB-450 J-6082-200-A J-3 Color chart for pattern box J-6020-250-A J-4 Siemens star J-6080-875-A For checking the flange back J-5 Adjusting remote commander (RM-95 upgraded) (Note2) J-6082-053-B J-6 Clear chart for pattern box J-6080-621-A White balance adjustment. J-7 CPC-12 jig J-6082-436-A For connecting the adjustment remote commander For adjusting the LCD block J-8 Alignment disk (Two disks as a pair) TFD2-1(+) 8-967-990-01 Dynamic inspection disk with LCD adjustment signal TFD2-2(–) 8-967-990-11 J-9 Personal computer PC with Windows installed J-10 Cleaning disk (OR-D29WA) 8-960-009-39 FDD head cleaning (Note 1) Cleaning disk Available on market J-11 Mini pattern box J-6082-353-B For adjusting the flange back J-12 Power supply cord (DC) J-6082-223-A For the battery down adjustment Note 1: Usage and operating note Note 2: If the microprocessor IC in the adjusting remote One or two seconds of momentary use of cleaning disk is commander is not the new microprocessor (UPD7503G- sufficient such that FD is accessed momentarily by system C56-12), the pages cannot be switched. control when the main power is turned on. After cleaning, In this case, replace with the new microprocessor (8-759- insert a FD for playback. When cleaning is insufficient, 148-35). use a cleaning disk again. Caution: Avoid using a cleaning disk excessively. Head can be broken. J-1 J-2 J-3 J-4 J-5 J-6 J-7 J-8 J-9 J-10 J-11 J-12 Fig. 5-1-1 5-3, 1-1-2. Preparations Note 1: For details of how remove the cabinet and boards, refer to “2. DISASSEMBLY”. Pattern box Note 2: When performing only the adjustments, the lens block and boards need not be disassemble. 1) Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 5-1- 5. Front side of the lens 2) Connect the Adjusting remote commander to FC-85 board CN803 via CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A). (See Fig. 5-1-3) 1.5m Note 3: Setting the “Forced CAMERA mode power ON” Mode 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote com- mander. The Above procedure will enable the camera power to be turned on. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced CAMERA mode power ON Mode”. Fig. 5-1-2 Note 4: Exiting the “Forced CAMERA mode power ON Mode” 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote com- mander. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. 1-1-3. Discharging of the Flashlight Power Supply The capacitor which is used as power supply of flashlight is charged with 200 V to 300 V voltage. Discharge this voltage before start- ing adjustments in order to protect service engineers from electric shock during adjustment. Discharge procedure 1. Press the FLASH button (PK-55 board S705) and turn off the FLASH LED (PK-55 board D701). 2. Fabricate the discharging jig as shown in Fig. 5-1-5 locally by yourself. Connect the discharging jig to the positive (+) and negative (–) terminal of the flash voltage charge capacitor. Al- low ten seconds to discharge the voltage. CPC cover R: 1 kΩ/1 W 22 (Part code: 1 1-215-869-11) FC-85 board CN803 CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A) (22p flexible board) Fig. 5-1-3 Capacitor 1 kΩ/1 W Wrap insulating tape. Fig. 5-1-5 Fig. 5-1-4 5-4,

AC

VF-141 BOARD power adaptor AC IN FU-153 BOARD CN501 CN601 AE-25 BOARD Must be connected

EVF

Need not CN001 when the MIC UNIT is used.

LCD

connected CN351 CN002 MIC UNIT MF UNIT MA-404 BOARD CN004 CN303 CN003 FDD UNIT CN305 CN301

FLASH

UNIT CN306 VP-55 BOARD LENS UNIT CN402 SHUTTER CN235 CN001 BLOCKCN002 Must be connected CN234 CN301 when the FLASH UNIT CN802 ZOOM CN231 is used.CN701 BLOCK CN232 CN702 CN236 CN703 FC-85 BOARD Adjusting CN101 Remote CN101 CommanderCN102 CN182CN183 CD-311 BOARD CN401 CN801 CN803 Must be connected CN401 when the EVF is used. CF-83 BOARD Audio A/V OUT Jack (black) CN851 CN901 Terminated CN701 CPC-12 jig 75 Ω Video (J-6082-436-A) Vectorscope Color (yellow) PK-55 BOARD monitor CN702 SPEAKER To LCD BACK LIGHT To LCD PANEL Note: Connect the GND terminal to Floppy disk drive unit frame when check the RF signals waveform. Fig. 5-1-6 5-5, 1-1-4. Precautions 1. Setting the Switch Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and per- form adjustments. 1. PLAY/CAMERA/MOVIE switch (PK-55 board S708, S710) ... CAMERA 2. FOCUS AUTO/MANUAL switch (CF-83 board S402) ... MANUAL 3. PROGRAM AE button (AE-25 board S354) ... AUTO (No mark indicated on LCD) 4. DISPLAY button (PK-55 board S702) ... OSD OFF 5. WHITE BALANCE button (AE-25 board S353) ... AUTO 6. P.EFFECT (Menu display) ... OFF 7. DEMO (Menu display) ... OFF 8. VIDEO OUT (Menu display) ... NTSC 2. Order of Adjustments Basically carry out adjustments in the order given. Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Electronic beam scanning frame

H

C C=D D CRT picture frame

V

A B A=BBAFig. b (monitor TV picture) Enlargement Difference in level Adjust the camera zoom and direction to obtain the output waveform shown in Fig a and the monitor TV display shown in Fig. b. B A Fig. 5-1-7 3. Subjects 1) Color bar chart (Standard picture frame). When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, ad- just the picture frame as shown in Fig. 5-1-7. (Standard pic- ture frame) 2) Clear chart (Standard picture frame) Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations dur- White 841 mm ing this time) 3) Chart for flange back adjustment Black Join together a piece of white A0 size paper (1189mm × 841 mm) and a piece of black paper to make the chart shown in Fig. 5-1-8. 1189 mm Note: Use a non-reflecting and non-glazing vellum paper. The size must be A0 or larger and the joint between the white Fig. 5-1-8 and black paper must not have any undulations. 5-6 Yellow Cyan Green White Magenta Red Blue Yellow Cyan Green White Magenta Red Blue, 4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box A dark room is required to provide an accurate flash adjustment. If it is not available, prepare the flash adjustment box as given below; 1) Provide woody board A, B and C of 15 mm thickness. woody board A (2) woody board B (2) woody board C (1) 530 mm 500 mm 1000 mm 1026 mm 1026 mm 1000 mm 1030 mm 1000 mm Fig. 5-1-9 2) Apply black mat paint to one side of woody board A and B. 3) Attach background paper (J-2501-130-A) to woody board C. 4) Assemble so that the black sides and the background paper side of woody board A, B and C are internal. (Fig 5-1-10) woody board A woody board B woody board A woody board B woody board C Fig. 5-1-10 5-7, 1-2. INITIALIZATION OF B, D, E, F, 7 PAGE DATA 3. D Page Table 1-2-1. Initialization of D Page Data Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. 1. Initializing D Page Data (Refer to “1. Initializing of D Page Data”) Note: If the D page data has been initialized, the following Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data. adjustments need to be performed again. (Refer to “2. Modification of D Page Data”) 1) Modification of D page data 2) LCD system adjustments Address Initial value Remark 3) Battery end adjustments 00 to 0F 10 00 Test mode Adjusting page D 11 to 88 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Adjusting Address 10 to EF 89 Zoom center adj. Initializing Method: 8A to 8F Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Order Page Address Data Procedure 90 80 Battery down adj. 1 0 01 01 91 882203 01 92 AD3200 2D 93 C24201 2D Press PAUSE button. 94 CD5202 Check the data changes to “01”. 95 to C0 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Perform “Modification of D C1 A0 White balance adj. (EVF) 6 page Data”. C2 78 C3, C4 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 2. Modification of D Page Data C5 88 VCO adj. (NTSC) (EVF) If the D page data has been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed data-2” address shown in the following table by manual input. C6 B0 Backlight Consumption Current adj. (EVF) Modifying Method: C7, C8 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set C9 A8 Bright adj. (NTSC) (EVF) data: 01. CA 88 Contrast adj. (NTSC) (EVF) 2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy CB A8 Bright adj. (PAL) (EVF) the data built in the same model. CC 88 Contrast adj. (PAL) (EVF) Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the CD 80 VCO adj. (PAL) (EVF) camcorder may not operate. 3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the CE, CF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) adjustment remote commander each time when setting new D0 A2 / B2 Bright adj. (LCD) (Note 3) data to write the data in the non-volatile memory. D1 70 / 74 Color adj. (LCD) (Note 3) 4) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. If not, change the data to the initial value. D2 A0 / A8 White balance adj. (LCD) (Note 3) D3 7A Processing after Completing Modification of D Page Data: D4 B8 / C0 Contrast adj. (LCD) (Note 3) Order Page Address Data Procedure D5 B0 / 54 D range adj. (LCD) (Note 3) 1 2 00 29 D6 68 / 8A V-COM level adj. (LCD) (Note 3) 2 2 01 29 Press PAUSE button. D7 6F VCO adj. (NTSC) (LCD) D8 7A / 8A V-COM adj. (LCD) (Note 3) D9 to DC Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) DD 6F / 5F VCO adj. (PAL) (LCD) (Note 3) DF to EB Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) EC 22 Eye sensor adj. ED to EF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Note 3: LCD TYPE S / LCD TYPE C 5-8, 1-2-2. Initialization of B, E, F, 7 Page Data 3. B Page Table 1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 Page Data Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. Note: If the B, E, F Page data has been initialized, “Modification (Refer to “1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) of B, E, F, 7 Page Data” and following adjustments need Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data. to be performed again. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) 1) Modification of B, E, F, 7 page data Address Initial value Remark 2) Video system adjustments 3) Camera system adjustments 00 Fixed data-2 01 to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Adjusting page F Adjusting Address 10 to FF Adjusting page E 4. E Page Table Adjusting Address 00 to FF Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) Adjusting page B Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data. Adjusting Address 00 to FF (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) Adjusting page 7 Address Initial value Remark Adjusting Address 00 to FF 00 to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Initializing Method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 012600 FF3601 FF Press PAUSE button. 4 6 02 01 Check the data changes to “01”. 5 6 03 016600 2D7601 2D Press PAUSE button. 8 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Perform “Modification of B, E, F, 7 page Data”. 2. Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data If the B, E, F, 7 Page data has been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed data-2” address shown in the following tables by manual input. Modifying Method: 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the data built in the same model. Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may not operate. 3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time when setting new data to write the data in the non-volatile memory. 4) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. If not, change the data to the initial value. Processing after Completing Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page data Order Page Address Data Procedure1200 292201 29 Press PAUSE button. 5-9, 5. F Page Table Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1.Initializing of B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2.Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) Address Initial value Remark Address Initial value Remark 00 to 0F Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 4F 00 White balance ND filter compensation 10 to 13 Fixed data-2 50 00 14 12 Flange back adj. 51 03 Color reproduction adj. 15 A8 52 E9 (ND filter ON) 16 38 53 63 17 08 54 83 18 17 55 D5 19 67 56 FE 1A 00 57 73 1B 00 58 45 1C 00 59 00 Auto white balance standard 1D 00 data input 1E 41 5A 14 Mechanical shutter adj. 1F 00 5B Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 20 20 5C 63 Color reproduction adj. 21 20 5D 83 22 20 5E 03 23 44 5F E9 24 0A 60 63 Color reproduction adj. 25 00 61 83 (ND filter ON) 26 85 Light level adj. 62 03 27 Fixed data-2 63 E9 28 94 Light level adj. 64 10 Strobe white balance adj. 29 47 F No. standard data input 65 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 2A 41 66 61 Video burst level adj. 2B 3D 67, 68 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 2C 3D 69 00 Strobe white balance adj. 2D Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 6A E3 2E 80 Hall adj. 6B 00 2F 93 6C 0B Mechanical shutter adj. 30 Fixed data-2 6D C2 31 to 33 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 6E 09 34 15 Hall adj. 6F 42 35 7C 70 06 36 to 39 Fixed data-2 71 C2 3A 2F Auto white balance standard 72 05 3B 37 data input 73 C2 3C 40 74 04 3D D0 75 C2 3E Fixed data-2 76 33 3F B5 Auto white balance adj. 77 33 40 43 78 33 41 03 Color reproduction adj. 79 33 42 E9 7A 33 43 63 7B 33 44 83 7C 33 45 D5 7D 33 46 FE 7E 33 47 73 7F 33 48 45 80 00 Auto white balance adj. 49 to 4C Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 81 56 Video sync level adj. 4D 27 Strobe white balance adj. 82 to 9F Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 4E 77 5-10, Address Initial value Remark A0 00 Mixed color cancel adj. A1 00 A2 00 A3 00 A4 to AB Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) AC 80 Steady shot adj. (2) AD 80 Steady shot adj. (1) AE to AF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) B0 to FF Fixed data-2 5-11, 6. 7 Page Table Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) Address Initial value Remark Address Initial value Remark 00 to 5F Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 8E 0F 60 0F 8F FF 61 FF 90 0F 62 0F 91 FF 63 FF 92 0F 64 0F 93 FF 65 FF 94 0F 66 0F 95 FF 67 FF 96 0F 68 0F 97 FF 69 FF 98 0F CCD white defect compensation 6A 0F 99 FF 6B FF 9A 0F 6C 0F 9B FF 6D FF 9C 0F 6E 0F 9D FF 6F FF 9E 0F 70 0F 9F FF 71 FF A0 0F 72 0F A1 FF 73 FF A2 0F 74 0F CCD black defect compensation A3 FF 75 FF A4 to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 76 0F 77 FF 78 0F 79 FF 7A 0F 7B FF 7C 0F 7D FF 7E 0F 7F FF 80 0F 81 FF 82 0F 83 FF 84 0F 85 FF 86 0F 87 FF 88 0F 89 FF 8A 0F CCD white defect compensation 8B FF 8C 0F 8D FF 5-12, 1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 2. Video Burst Level Adjustment 1. Video Sync Level Adjustment Adjust the burst level of the composite video signal output. Adjust the sync level of the composite video signal output. Mode PLAY Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Video terminal of A/V OUT jack Measurement Point Video terminal of A/V OUT jack (75 Ω terminated) (75 Ω terminated) Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page F Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 66 Adjustment Address 81 Specified Value A = 286 ± 10 mVp-p (NTSC) Specified Value A = 286 ± 5 mVp-p (NTSC) A = 300 ± 12 mVp-p (PAL) A = 300 ± 6 mVp-p (PAL) Adjusting method: Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 011001 0125F1 0425F1 04 Change the data and set the Change the data and set the3F66 burst level (A) to the3F81 sync level (A) to the specified specified value. value. 4 Press PAUSE button 4 Press PAUSE button Processing after Completing Adjustments: Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure15F1 0015F1 002001 002001 00

A A

H H Fig. 5-1-11 Fig. 5-1-12 5-13, 1-4. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS” are sat- isfied. Data setting during camera system adjustment Perform the following data setting before the camera system ad- justments. Data setting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 012E43 10 Press PAUSE button. 3 E 8F 00 Press PAUSE button. 4 B 67 00 Press PAUSE button. After completing the camera system adjustments, release the data setting: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 012E43 08 Press PAUSE button. 3 E 8F 11 Press PAUSE button. 4 B 67 85 Press PAUSE button. 5 0 01 00 5-14, 1. HALL Adjustment Processing after Completing Adjustment: For detecting the position of lens iris, adjust the HALL AMP gain Order Page Address Data Procedure and offset. 1 0 03 00 Mode CAMERA2601 00 Press PAUSE button. Subject Not required3695 00 Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1 (Note 2) 4 6 94 00 Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander55F1 00 Adjustment PageF6D63 00 Press PAUSE button. Adjustment Address 2E, 2F, 34, 35 Release the data setting Specified Value 13 to 17 during IRIS OPEN 7 performed at step 4. 7B to 7F during IRIS CLOSE (Refer to page 5-14) Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. 8 0 01 00 If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON. Note 2: The right 2 digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the adjusting remote commander. 1:00:XX Displayed data Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-14) 5 6 94 156695 7D7601 6D Press PAUSE button. (Note 3) 8 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. 9 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. Note 3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 2E, 2F, 34 and 35. Checking method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1003 032601 01 Press PAUSE button. Check that the displayed data31(Note 2) during IRIS OPEN satisfies the specified value. 4 6 01 03 Press PAUSE button. Check that the displayed data51(Note 2)during IRIS CLOSE satisfies the specified value. 5-15, 2. Flange Back Adjustment (Using the minipattern box) Specified voltage: The specified voltage varies according to the The flange back of inner focus lens is adjusted automatically. If minipatternbox, so adjustment the power sup- shifted, the auto focus is disordered. ply output voltage to the specified voltage writ- ten on the sheet which is supplied with the mini- Mode CAMERA pattern box. Subject Siemens star chart with ND filter Below 3 cm for minipattern box (Note 1) Minipattern box Measurement Point Check operation on the LCD Measuring Instrument screen Camera Adjustment Page F Camera Adjustment Address 14 to 25 table Note 1: Dark Siemens star chart. Regulated power supply Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. Output voltage : Specified voltage ± 0.01 Vdc If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. Output current : more than 3.5 A Preparations before adjustments: 1) The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following fig- Red (+) ure. Note 3: The attachment lenses are not used. Black (–) Note 4: Take care not to hit the mini-pattern box when Yellow (SENS +) extending the lens. 2) Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and White (SENS –) Need not connected the front of lens of camera is less than 3 cm. Black (GND) 3) Make the height of minipattern box and the camera equal. 4) Check the output voltage of the regulated power supply is the Fig. 5-1-13 specified voltage ± 0.01 Vdc. 5) Check that the center of Siemens star chart meets the center of Adjusting method: shot image screen with the zoom lens at TELE end and WIDE end respectively. Order Page Address Data Procedure 6) Check that the data on page: F, address: 14 to 25 are initial1001 01 value (See table below). 2 5 F1 FF Address Data Address Data3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. 14 12 1D 00 Perform “Data setting during 15 A8 1E 41 4 camera system adjustment”. 16 38 1F 00 (Refer to page 5-14) 17 08 20 205601 13 Press PAUSE button. 18 17 21 206601 27 Press PAUSE button. (Note 5) 19 67 22 207602 Check the data changes to “01”. 1A 00 23 44 Note 5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 14 to 25. 1B 00 24 0A 1C 00 25 00 Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Press PAUSE button. 2 5 F1 003D63 00 Press PAUSE button. Release the data setting 4 performed at step 4. (Refer to page 5-14) 5 0 01 00 6 Perform“Flange Back Check”. 5-16, 3. Flange Back Adjustment Adjusting method: (Using the flange back adjustment chart and a subject Order Page Address Data Procedure more than 500 m away) The flange back of inner focus lens is adjusted automatically. If1001 01 shifted, the auto focus is disordered. 2 5 F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. 3-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1) Perform “Data setting during Mode CAMERA 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-14) Subject Flange back adjustment chart (2.0 m from the front of lens) 5 6 01 13 Press PAUSE button. (Luminance: 300 to 400 lux) 6 6 01 15 Press PAUSE button. (Note 2) Measurement Point Check operation on the LCD7602 Check the data changes to “01”. Measuring Instrument screen Note 2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to Adjustment Page F page: F, address: 14 to 25. Adjustment Address 14 to 25 Processing after Completing Adjustment: Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Press PAUSE button. Preparations before adjustments: 2 5 F1 00 1) Place the Flange back adjustment chart 2.0 m from the front of the lens. 3 D 63 00 Press PAUSE button. 2) Check that the center of Flange back adjustment chart meets Release the data setting the center of shot image screen with the zoom lens at TELE 4 performed at step 4. end and WIDE end respectively. (Refer to page 5-14) 3) Check that the data on page: F, address: 14 to 25 are initial5001 00 value (See table below). Perform“Flange Back Adjust- Address Data Address Data ment (2)”. 14 12 1D 00 15 A8 1E 41 16 38 1F 00 17 08 20 20 18 17 21 20 19 67 22 20 1A 00 23 44 1B 00 24 0A 1C 00 25 00 5-17, 3-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2) 4. Flange Back Check Perform this adjustment after performing “Flange Back Adjust- ment (1)”. Mode CAMERA Mode CAMERA Subject Siemens star (2.0 m from the front of the lens) Subject Subject more than 500 m away (Luminance: approx. 200 lux) (Subjects with clear contrast such as buildings, etc.) Measurement Point Check operation on the LCD Measurement Point Check operation on the LCD Measuring Instrument screen Measuring Instrument screen Specified value Focused at the TELE end and WIDE end Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 14 to 25 Checking method: Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Place the Siemens star 2.0 m Order Page Address Data Procedure from the front of the lens. Set the zoom lens to the To open the IRIS , decrease TELE end and exposea1the luminous intensity to the subject that is more than 500 Siemens star up to a point m away (subject with clear 1 before noise appear on thecontrast such as building, image. etc.). (Nearby subjects less2001 01 than 500 m away should not be in the screen) 3 5 F1 FF2001 014D63 40 Press PAUSE button. 3 5 F1 FF Perform “Data setting during 5 camera system adjustment”. 4 D 63 40 Press PAUSE button. (Refer to page 5-14) Perform “Data setting during 5 Shoot the Siemens star withcamera system adjustment”. 6 the zoom TELE end. (Refer to page 5-14) Check that the lens is6601 13 Press PAUSE button. 7 focused. Place the ND filter on the862C 01 7 lens so that the optimum image is obtain. While observe the LCD 9 screen, change the zoom to8 6 01 29 Press PAUSE button. (Note 1) the WIDE end and check that9602 Check the data changes to “01”. the lens is focused. Note 1: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 14 to 25. Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure Processing after Completing Adjustment: 1 6 2C 00 Order Page Address Data Procedure25F1 001601 00 Press PAUSE button. 3 D 63 00 Press PAUSE button. 2 5 F1 00 Release the data setting3D63 00 Press PAUSE button. 4 performed at step 5. Release the data setting (Refer to page 5-14) 4 performed at step 5. 5 0 01 00 (Refer to page 5-14) 5 0 01 00 6 Perform“Flange Back Check”. 5-18, 5. F No. Standard Data Input 6. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment Compensate the unevenness of the iris meter sensitivity. Adjust the period which the mechanical shutter is closed, and com- pensate the exposure. Mode CAMERA Subject Clear chart Mode CAMERA (Color reproduction adjustment Subject Clear chart frame with the zoom lens at WIDE (10 cm from the front of the lens) end) Adjustment Page F Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 5A, 6C to 7F Adjustment Address 29 to 2C Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. Note 2: “F No. Standard Data Input” is available only once after Adjusting method: the power is turned on. Turn the power off, then on again if the adjustment is retried. Order Page Address Data Procedure Shoot the Clear chart with Adjusting method: the zoom WIDE end. Order Page Address Data Procedure2001 01 Shoot the Clear chart with35F1 FF the zoom WIDE end. 4 D 63 40 Press PAUSE button. 2 0 01 01 Perform “Data setting during35F1 FF 5 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-14) 4 D 63 40 Press PAUSE button. 6 6 01 AD Press PAUSE button (Note 2) Perform “Data setting during 5 camera system adjustment”. Check the data changes to7 6 02 (Refer to page 5-14) “01”. 6 E 51 Note down the data. Check the data. 8 6 AB 00 : Normal7E51 FF Press PAUSE button. 01 to FF : Defective Press PAUSE button. 8 6 01 BB (Note 3) Note 2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 5A and 6C to 7F. Check the data changes to9602 “01”. Processing after Completing Adjustment: Note 3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: Order Page Address Data Procedure F, address: 29 to 2C. 1 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. Processing after Completing Adjustment: 2 5 F1 00 Order Page Address Data Procedure3D63 00 Press PAUSE button. 1 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. Release the data setting Set data noted down at step 6, 4 performed at step 5. 2 E 51 and press PAUSE button. (Refer to page 5-14) 3 5 F1 005001 004D63 00 Press PAUSE button. Release the data setting 5 performed at step 5. (Refer to page 5-14) 6 0 01 00 5-19, 7. Picture Frame Setting How to reset the zoom and focus when they deviated: Mode CAMERA Order Page Address Data Procedure1690 XL (Note 2) Subject Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment2691 XH (Note 2) frame) 3 6 92 YL (Note 3) Measurement Point Video terminal of A/V OUT jack4693 YH (Note 3) (75 Ω terminated) 5 6 01 79 Press PAUSE button. Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope and TV monitor 6 Wait for 1 second. Specified Value A=B, C=D, E=F762C 01 Note 1: Displayed data of the page 1 of adjusting remote com- 8 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. mander. 1:XX:XX Note 2: The data noted down at step 8 of “Setting method”. XL or YL data Note 3: The data noted down at step 10 of “Setting method”. XH or YH data Check on the oscilloscope Setting method: 1. Horizontal period Order Page Address Data Procedure A=B C=D1001 01BC25F1 FFAD3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-14) Adjust the zoom and the camera 5 direction, and set to the picture frame to the specified position. Mark the position of the picture frame on the TV monitor, and adjust the picture frame to this 6 position in following adjustment using “Color reproduction adjustment frame”. 7 0 03 18 Fig. 5-1-14 Note down the XH and XL812. Vertical period data. (Note 1) E E=FF9003 22 Note down the YH and YL 10 1 data. (Note 1) 11 0 03 00 12 5 F1 00 V 13 D 63 00 Press PAUSE button. Fig. 5-1-15 Release the data setting Check on the TV monitor 14 performed at step 4. (Refer to page 5-14) 15 0 01 00 Color bar chart picture frame TV monitor picture frame Fig. 5-1-16 5-20, 8. Light Level Adjustment and ND Shutter Check Processing after Completing Adjustment: Adjust the standard LV value. Order Page Address Data Procedure Mode CAMERA1003 00 Subject Clear chart2601 00 Press PAUSE button. (Color reproduction adjustment35F1 00 frame) 4 D 63 00 Press PAUSE button. Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1 (Note 2) Release the data setting Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander 5 performed at step 4. Adjustment Page F (Refer to page 5-14) Adjustment Address 26, 286001 00 Specified Value AE level 1: 0FE0 to 1020 AE level 2: Below 1000 Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON. Note 2: The right 4 digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the adjusting remote commander. 1:XX:XX Displayed data Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-14) 5 6 01 0D Press PAUSE button. (Note 3) 6 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. 7 0 03 06 Check that the displayed data81(Note 2) satisfies the AE level 1 specified value. 9 E 41 6B Press PAUSE button. 10 6 1C 03 Check that the displayed data 11 1 (Note 2) satisfies the AE level 2 specified value. 12 6 1C 00 13 E 41 6A Press PAUSE button. Note 3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 26 and 28. 5-21, 9. Mixed Color Cancel Adjustment 10. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input To perform mixed color cancel adjustment based on data of each Adjust the white balance standard data at 3200K. color in color bar. Mode CAMERA Mode CAMERA Subject Clear chart Subject Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment (Color reproduction adjustment frame) frame) Adjustment Page F Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 3A to 3D, 59 Adjustment Address A0 to A3 Note 1: Perform “Light Level Adjustment” and “Mixed Color Note 1: Perform “Light Level Adjustment” before this Cancel Adjustment” before this adjustment. adjustment. Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. Note 2: Perform “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” Note 3: “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” is available after this adjustment. only once after the power is turned on. Turn the power Note 3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. off, then on again if the adjustment is retried. If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON. Adjusting method: Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 011001 0125F1 FF25F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. 3 D 63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-14) (Refer to page 5-14) 5 6 01 11 Press PAUSE button. 5 6 01 D7 Press PAUSE button. 6 6 01 0B Press PAUSE button. (Note 4) Press PAUSE button. (Note7602 Check the data changes to6 6 01 D5 4) “01”. 7 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Note 4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: Note 4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to F, address: 3A to 3D and 59. page: F, address: A0 to A3. Processing after Completing Adjustment: Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Press PAUSE button. 1 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. 2 5 F1 0025F1 003D63 00 Press PAUSE button. 3 D 63 00 Press PAUSE button. Release the data setting 4 performed at step 4. Release the data setting (Refer to page 5-14) 4 performed at step 4. 5 0 01 00 (Refer to page 5-14) 6 Perform “Auto White5 0 01 00 Balance Adjustment”. 5-22, 11. Auto White Balance ND Filter Compensation Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data with Built-in ND filter. If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility will be poor. Mode CAMERA Subject Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 4F, 50 Note 1: Perform “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” be- fore this adjustment. Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON. Note 3: “Auto White Balance ND Filter Compensation” is avail- able only once after the power is turned on. Turn the power off, then on again if the adjustment is retried. Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-14) 5 F 27 Note down the data. 6 F 27 80 Press PAUSE button. 7 6 1C 03 Press PAUSE button. 8 Wait for 1 second. 9 6 01 11 Press PAUSE button. 10 6 01 09 Press PAUSE button. (Note 4) 11 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Note 4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 4F and 50. Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Press PAUSE button. 2 6 1C 00 Set the data noted down at3F27 step 5, and press PAUSE button. 4 5 F1 005D63 00 Press PAUSE button. Release the data setting 6 performed at step 4. (Refer to page 5-14) 7 0 01 00 5-23, 12. Auto White Balance Adjustment Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data. If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility Check that the displayed data will be poor. 13 1 (Note 3) satisfied the R ratio specified value. Mode CAMERA 14 0 03 05 Subject Clear chart Check that the displayed data (Color reproduction adjustment 15 1 (Note 3) satisfied the B ratio frame) specified value. Filter Filter C14 for color temperature Note 5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: correction F, address: 3F, 40 and 80. Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1 (Note 3) Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander Processing after Completing Adjustment: Adjustment Page F Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjustment Address 3F, 40, 801003 00 Specified Value R ratio: 2760 to 28A02601 00 Press PAUSE button. B ratio: 5DE0 to 5F20 49 Set the data noted down at3F4A Note 1: Perform “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” be- step 7, and press PAUSE 4B fore this adjustment. button. 4C Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. 4 5 F1 00 Note 3: The right 4 digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the5D63 00 Press PAUSE button. adjusting remote commander. Release the data setting 1:XX:XX 6 performed at step 5. Displayed data (Refer to page 5-14) Note 4: “Auto White Balance Adjustment” is available only once7001 00 after the power is turned on. Turn the power off, then on again if the adjustment is retried. Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Place the C14 filter on the lens. 2 0 01 0135F1 FF4D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 5 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-14) 6 6 01 A7 Press PAUSE button. 4A7FNote down the data. 4B 4C 49 28 4A 008F4B 5E Press PAUSE button. 4C 809601 A5 Press PAUSE button. (Note 5) Check the data changes to 10 6 02 “01”. 11 6 01 3F Press PAUSE button. 12 0 03 04 5-24, 13. Color Reproduction Adjustment 13-2. Color Reproduction Adjustment (With ND Filter) Adjust the color separation matrix coefficient so that proper color reproduction is produced. Mode CAMERA Subject Color bar chart 13-1. Color Reproduction Adjustment (Without ND Filter) (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Mode CAMERA Adjustment Page F Subject Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment Adjustment Address 51 to 58, 60 to 63 frame) Note 1: Perform “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” and Adjustment Page F “Auto White Balance ND Filter Compensation” before this adjustment. Adjustment Address 41 to 48, 5C to 5F Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If Note 1: Perform “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON. before this adjustment. Note 3: “Color Reproduction Adjustment” is available only once Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. after the power is turned on. Turn the power off, then on If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON. again if the adjustment is retried. Note 3: “Color Reproduction Adjustment” is available only once after the power is turned on. Turn the power off, then on Adjusting method: again if the adjustment is retried. Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjusting method: 1 0 01 01 Order Page Address Data Procedure25F1 FF1001 013D63 40 Press PAUSE button. 2 5 F1 FF Perform “Data setting during4 camera system adjustment”. 3 D 63 40 Press PAUSE button. (Refer to page 5-14) Perform “Data setting during5F27 Note down the data. 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-14) 6 F 27 80 Press PAUSE button. 5 B 75 Note down the data. 7 B 75 Note down the data. 6 B 75 00 Press PAUSE button. 8 B 75 00 Press PAUSE button. 7 6 01 AB Press PAUSE button. 9 6 1C 038612 80 Press PAUSE button. 10 Wait for 1 second. 9 Wait for 1 second. 11 6 01 C3 Press PAUSE button. 10 6 12 00 Press PAUSE button. 12 6 12 80 Press PAUSE button. 11 Wait for 2 seconds. 13 Wait for 1 seconds. 12 6 01 A9 Press PAUSE button. (Note 4) 14 6 12 00 Press PAUSE button. 13 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. 15 Wait for 2 seconds. 16 6 01 C1 Press PAUSE button. (Note 4) Note 4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 41 to 48 and 5C to 5F. 17 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Note 4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to Processing after Completing Adjustment: page: F, address: 51 to 58 and 60 to 63. Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Press PAUSE button. Set the data noted down at2B75 step 5, and press PAUSE button. 3 5 F1 FF4D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Release the data setting 5 performed at step 4. (Refer to page 5-14) 6 0 01 00 Perform “Color Reproduc- 7 tion Check”. 5-25, Processing after Completing Adjustment: 14. Color Reproduction Check Order Page Address Data Procedure Mode CAMERA1601 00 Press PAUSE button. Subject Color bar chart261C 00 (Color reproduction adjustment Set the data noted down at frame) 3 B 75 step 7, and press PAUSE Measurement Point Video terminal of A/V OUT jack button. (75 Ω terminated) Set the data noted down at Measuring Instrument LCD screen or Vectorscope4F27 step 5, and press PAUSE Specified Value All color luminance points button. should settle within each color55F1 FF reproduction frame. 6 D 63 40 Press PAUSE button. Release the data setting 7 Adjusting method:performed at step 4. (Refer to page 5-14) Order Page Address Data Procedure8001 001001 01 Perform “Color Reproduc- 2 5 F1 FF 9 tion Check”. 3 D 63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-14) 5 B 75 Note down the data. 6 B 75 00 Press PAUSE button. 7 6 10 018E52 Note down the data. 9 E 52 0A Press PAUSE button. 10 6 01 0F Press PAUSE button. 11 6 12 80 Press PAUSE button. 12 Wait for 1 second. 13 6 12 00 Press PAUSE button. 14 Wait for 2 seconds. Check the each color 15 luminance point is each color reproduction frame. (ND OFF) 16 F 27 Note down the data. 17 F 27 80 Press PAUSE button. 18 6 1C 03 19 Wait for 1 second. 20 6 12 80 Press PAUSE button. 21 Wait for 1 second. 22 6 12 00 Press PAUSE button. 23 Wait for 2 seconds. Check the each color 24 luminance point is each color reproduction frame.(ND ON) Set the data noted down at 25 F 27 step 16, and press PAUSE button. 5-26, Processing after Completing Adjustment: For NTSC mode Order Page Address Data Procedure R-Y1601 00 Press PAUSE button. 2 6 1C 003610 00 R MG Set the data noted down at4E52 step 8, and press PAUSE button. Set the data noted down at YE5B75 step 5, and press PAUSE button. B-Y65F1 FFB7D63 00 Press PAUSE button. Release the data setting 8 performed at step 4. (Refer to page 5-14) CY

G

9 0 01 00 Burst position Fig. 5-1-17 For PAL mode R-Y Burst position

MG R YE

B-Y

B CY G

Fig. 5-1-18 5-27,

Ver 1.1 2001. 06

15. Auto White Balance Check Order Page Address Data Procedure Mode CAMERA INDOOR data check (with ND filter) Subject Clear chart 21 F 27 Note down the data. (Color reproduction adjustment 22 F 27 80 Press PAUSE button. frame) 23 6 1C 03 Measurement Point Displayed data of Video terminal 24 Wait for 1 second. of Page: 1 A/V OUT jack (Note 2) (75 Ω terminated) 25 0 03 04 Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote Vectorscope Check that the displayed data commander 26 1 (Note 2) satisfied the R ratio specified value. Specified Value R ratio: Fig. 5-1-19 3E00 to 4200 (A) and (B) 27 0 03 05 B ratio: Check that the displayed data 3E00 to 4200 28 1 (Note 2) satisfied the B ratio Note 1: Refer to “Picture Frame Setting” for XH, XL, YH and specified value. YL. Set the data noted down at Note 2: The right 4 digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the 29 F 27 step 21, and press PAUSE adjusting remote commander. button. 1:XX:XX INDOOR luminance point check Displayed data 30 6 1C 00 Checking method: 31 0 03 00 Order Page Address Data Procedure Check that the center of the 32 white luminance point withinCheck that the lens is not 1 the circle showncovered with either filter. Fig. 5-1-19 (A). 2 0 01 01 OUTDOOR luminance check35F1 FF Place the C14 filter on the4D63 40 Press PAUSE button. 33 lens. Perform “Data setting during 34 E 4B Note down the data. 5 camera system adjustment”. 35 E 4B 20 Press PAUSE button. (Refer to page 5-14) 36 6 01 3F Press PAUSE button. 6 6 90 XL (Note 1) Check that the center of the7691 XH (Note 1) 37 white luminance point settles8692 YL (Note 1) in the circle shown9693 YH (Note 1) Fig. 5-1-19 (B). 10 6 6C 01 Processing after Completing Adjustment: 11 6 01 79 Press PAUSE button. 12 Wait for 1 second. Order Page Address Data Procedure 13 6 2C 011601 00 Press PAUSE button. INDOOR data check (without ND filter) 2 6 2C 00 14 E 52 Note down the data. 3 6 6C 00 15 E 52 0E Press PAUSE button. Set the data noted down at4 E 4B step 34, and press PAUSE 16 6 01 0F Press PAUSE button. button. 17 0 03 04 Set the data noted down at Check that the displayed data5E52 step 14, and press PAUSE 18 1 (Note 2)satisfied the R ratio button. specified value. 6 5 F1 FF 19 0 03 057D63 00 Press PAUSE button. Check that the displayed data Release the data setting 20 1 (Note 2) satisfied the B ratio 8 performed at step 5. specified value. (Refer to page 5-14) 9 0 01 00 5-28, R-Y B-Y 4 mm 4 mm Fig. 5-1-19 (A) R-Y 1 mm B-Y 1 mm 6 mm 6 mm Fig. 5-1-19 (B) 5-29, 16. Strobe White Balance Adjustment Adjust the white balance when the strobe light flashed. Mode CAMERA Subject Flash adjustment box (Note 3) (1.0 m from the front of lens) Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 4D, 4E, 64, 69, 6A, 6B Note 1: Perform “Hall Adjustment”, “Flange Back Adjustment”, “Light Level Adjustment” and “Auto White Balance Ad- justment” before this adjustment. Note 2: Perform this adjustment in the flash adjustment box. Note 3: Refer to “4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box”. (See page 5-7) Note 4: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON. Note 5: “Strobe White Balance Adjustment” is available only once after the power is turned on. Turn the power off, then on again if the adjustment is retried. Switch setting: 1) FLASH ... ON Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-14) 5 6 90 006691 007692 008693 C0966C 01 10 6 2C 01 11 6 01 79 Press PAUSE button. 12 6 01 67 Press PAUSE button. 13 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. 14 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. 15 6 01 79 Press PAUSE button. 16 6 01 67 Press PAUSE button. 17 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. 18 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. 19 6 01 79 Press PAUSE button. 20 6 01 B9 Press PAUSE button. (Note 6) 21 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Perform “Strobe Light Level and White Balance Check” Note 6: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 4D, 4E, 64, 69, 6A and 6B. 5-30, 17. Strobe Light Level and White Balance Check Processing after Completing Adjustment: Check the light level regulation and the white balance when the Order Page Address Data Procedure strobe light flashed. 1 0 03 00 Mode CAMERA2601 00 Press PAUSE button. Subject Flash adjustment box (Note 3) 3 6 2C 00 (1.0 m from the front of lens) 4 6 6C 00 Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 15693 00 Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander65F1 00 Specified value Y level data: 60 to 947D63 00 Press PAUSE button. R-Y level data: FA to FF or 00 to 06 (Note 4) Release the data setting B-Y level data: FA to FF or 00 to 06 performed at step 4 of (Note 4) 8 “Strobe White Balance Adjustment”. Note 1: Perform “Hall Adjustment”, “Flange Back Adjustment”, (Refer to page 5-14) “Light Level Adjustment” and “Auto White Balance Ad- justment” before this checking. 9 0 01 00 Perform this checking successively after performing “Strobe White Balance Adjustment”. (Do not turn the power of the unit OFF) Note 2: Perform this adjustment in the flash adjustment box. Note 3: Refer to “4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box”. (See page 5-7) Note 4: The right four digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the adjusting remote commander. 1:XX:XX B-Y level data R-Y level data Note 5: Displayed data of page: F, address: 64 of the adjusting remote commander. F:XX:64 Y level data Note 6: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. Checking method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 79 Press PAUSE button. 2 6 01 67 Press PAUSE button. 3 Check the flashing of strobe light. 4 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Check that the data satisfies5F64 the Y level data satisfied value. (Note 5) 6 0 03 02 Check the R-Y and B-Y level71data (Note 4) satisfies the specified value. 5-31, 18. CCD Black Defect Compensation Processing after Completing Adjustment: Mode CAMERA Order Page Address Data Procedure Subject Clear chart Set data noted down at step1 F DF (25 cm from the front of lens) 5, and press PAUSE button. Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 6, 2 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. address: 55362C 00 Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander4630 00 Adjustment Page7566C 00 Adjustment Address 60 to 876691 00 Note 1: Check that there are no dust, no dirt and reflection of the75F1 00 clear chart. 8 D 63 00 Press PAUSE button. Note 2: Any subject other than the clear chart should be in the Release the data setting screen. 9 performed at step 4. (Refer to page 5-14) Adjusting method: 10 0 01 00 Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-14) 5 F DF Note down the data. 6 F DF 4C Press PAUSE button. 7 6 2C 018690 009691 03 10 6 92 00 11 6 93 00 12 6 6C 01 13 6 01 79 Press PAUSE button. 14 6 30 01 15 Wait for 4 seconds. 16 6 01 8D Press PAUSE button. (Note 3) 17 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Check the data. 18 6 55 00 to 0A : Normal 0B to FF : Defective 19 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. 20 F DF 5A Press PAUSE button. 21 6 01 89 Press PAUSE button. 22 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Check the data. 23 6 55 00: Normal 01 to FF: Defective Note 3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 7, address: 60 to 87. 5-32, 19. CCD White Defect Compensation Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure Mode CAMERA Set data noted down at step Subject Clear chart1FDE 5, and press PAUSE button. (25 cm from the front of lens) Set data noted down at step Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 6, 2 F E3 7, and press PAUSE button. address: 553601 00 Press PAUSE button. Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander45F1 00 Adjustment Page75D63 00 Press PAUSE button. Adjustment Address 88 to A3 Release the data setting Note 1: Check that there are no dust, no dirt and reflection of the 6 performed at step 4. clear chart. (Refer to page 5-14) Note 2: Any subject other than the clear chart should be in the screen. 7 0 01 00 Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-14) 5 F DE Note down the data. 6 F DE 1E Press PAUSE button. 7 F E3 Note down the data. 8 F E3 18 Press PAUSE button. 9 6 01 8B Press PAUSE button. (Note 3) 10 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Check the data. 11 6 55 00 to 7F: Normal 80 to FF: Defective 12 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. 13 F DE 0F Press PAUSE button. 14 F E3 A0 Press PAUSE button. 15 6 01 87 Press PAUSE button. 16 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Check the data. 17 6 55 00: Normal 01 to FF: Defective Note 3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 7, address: 88 to A3. 5-33, 20. Steady shot adjustment Adjusting method: • Perform the steady shot adjustment only when replacing the Order Page Address Data Procedure angular velocity sensor. When the microprocessor, circuit, etc. malfunctions, do not perform this adjustment but check opera- Expose pattern A with the zoom1 tions only. TELE end. • Record the sensitivity label of the angular velocity sensor (re- Adjust the inclination of the pair part), including to which side of the board it was attached camera so that the vertical black to, etc. If it has been attached incorrectly, the image will move 2 line comes to the center of the up and down or to the left and right during steady shot opera- screen. tion. Be sure to take note of this. 3 0 01 01 Precautions on the Parts Replacement4BFF 08 Press PAUSE button. There are two types of repair parts. 5 Turn off the HOLD switch. Type A ENC03JA Adjust to the falling edge of the Type B ENC03JB 6 waveform with vertical scale onReplace the broken sensor with a same type sensor. If replace with the oscilloscope. other type parts, the image will vibrate up and down or left and (Oscilloscope is H period.) right during hand-shake correction operations. After replacing, readjust according to the adjusting method after replacement. 7 Turn on the HOLD switch. Press PAUSE button. At this time, Precautions on Angular Velocity Sensor8BFF 09 measure the moving amount t1 The sensor incorporates a precision oscillator. Handle it with care (µ sec) of the falling edge of the as if it dropped, the balance of the oscillator will be disrupted and waveform. operations will not be performed properly. 9 Turn off the HOLD switch. Switch setting: Obtain DAD’using the following 1) Steady shot (FRONT SW block) ... ON equation (decimal calculation) 20-1. Steady Shot Adjustment (1) DAD’ = (4.0 / t1) × {1.01 / (Yaw sensor sensitivity) } × 94 Mode CAMERA (Note 1) Subject Pattern A Raise DAD’ to a whole number, (1.5 m from the front of protection 11 convert it to a hexadecimal digit glass) and take this as DAD. (Note 2) Measurement Point Video output terminal 12 Turn on the HOLD switch. Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope (H period) 13 F AD DAD Press PAUSE button. Adjustment Page F 14 B FF 08 Press PAUSE button. Adjustment Address AD Note 1: The Yaw sensor sensitivity (SE151 of CD-311 board) is labeled only on the repair parts. Note 2: Refer to table 5-2-2. “Hexadecimal- decimal conversion Pattern A table”. Processing after Completing Adjustment Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 00 2 Turn off the HOLD switch. Check that the steady shot × operation is performed normally.A4 size (297 mm 210 mm) Fig. 5-1-20 5-34 White BBllaacckk White,

H

Falling edge of Falling edge of waveform when waveform when data is “08” data is “09” t1 (µsec)

Fig. 5-1-21

5-35, 20-2. Steady Shot Adjustment (2) Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure Mode CAMERA1001 00 Subject Pattern B (1.5 m from the front of the 2 Turn off the HOLD switch. protection glass) Check that the steady shot Measurement Point Video output terminal operation is performed normally. Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope (V period) Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address AC V Pattern B White Black White A4 size (297 mm × 210 mm) Fig. 5-1-22 Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Expose pattern B with the zoom TELE end. Adjust the inclination of the 2 camera so that the horizontal black line comes to the center of the screen. Falling edge of Falling edge of3001 01 waveform when waveform when4BFE 08 Press PAUSE button. data is “08” data is “09” 5 Turn off the HOLD switch. Adjust to the falling edge of the 6 waveform with vertical scale on the oscilloscope. t2 (msec) (Oscilloscope is V period.) 7 Turn on the HOLD switch. Fig. 5-1-23 Press PAUSE button. At this time, 8 B FE 09 measure the moving amount t2 (msec) of the falling edge of the waveform. 9 Turn off the HOLD switch. Obtain DAC’using the following equation (decimal calculation) DAC’= (2.5 / t2) ×{1.00 / (Pitch sensor sensitivity) } ×104 (Note 1) Raise DAC’ to a whole number, 11 convert it to a hexadecimal digit and take this as DAC. (Note 2) 12 Turn on the HOLD switch. 13 F AC DAC Press PAUSE button. 14 B FE 08 Press PAUSE button. Note 1: The Pitch sensor sensitivity (SE150 of CD-311 board) is labeled only on the repair parts. Note 2: Refer to table 5-2-2. “Hexadecimal- decimal conversion table”. 5-36, 1-5. COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER SYSTEM 1. EVF Initial Data Input

ADJUSTMENTS

Mode CAMERA Note 1: The back light (fluorescent tube) is driven by a high volt- Signal Arbitrary age AC power supply. Therefore, do not touch the back Adjustment Page D light holder to avoid electrical shock. Note 2: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent dam- Adjustment Address 1C , C0 to CD ages caused by static electricity. Adjusting method: [Adjusting connector] 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. Most of the measuring points for adjusting the LCD system are 2) Select page: D, and enter the data given in the following table. concentrated in CN803 of the FC-85 board. Connect the Measuring Instruments via the CPC-12 jig (J-6082- Note: Press the PAUSE button each time the data are set, as the 436-A). data are written to non-volatile memory (EEPROM). The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN803. Address Data Remark Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name 1 FDDRF_B 12 LANC_OUT 1C 05 Fixed value 2 FDDRF_A 13 MAKER_RECOG C0 67 3 INDEX 14 PF7 C1 A0 White Balance Adjustment 4 REG_GND 15 TXD C2 78 5 N. C. 16 RXD C3 48 Fixed value 6 TRACK_00 17 RESET C4 57 7 HSY 18 HI_VDD C5 88 VCO Adjustment (NTSC) 8 COM 19 EVF_BL+ (N.C.) C6 B0 9 VG 20 EVF_BL_4.75 (N.C.) C7 A8 Fixed value 10 HI_UNREG 21 EVF_VG (N.C.) C8 00 11 LANC_IN 22 EVF_VCO (N.C.) C9 A8 Bright Adjustment (NTSC) CA 88 Contrast Adjustment (NTSC) CB A8 Bright Adjustment (PAL) CC 88 Contrast Adjustment (PAL) CD 80 VCO Adjustment (PAL) Processing after Completing Adjustments: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. Volt ohm meter 22 qd pin14pin CPC cover FC-85 board 22 CN803 CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A) Fig. 5-1-24 5-37, 2. VCO Adjustment (VF-141 board) Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the EVF screen will be blurred. Mode CAMERA A Subject Arbitrary Pin ws of CN803 (EVF_VCO) on Measurement Point FC-85 board Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope GND level Adjustment Page D (0 Vdc)Fig. 5-1-25 C5 (NTSC) Adjustment Address CD (PAL ) A = 1.70 ± 0.06 V (NTSC) Specified Value A = 1.25 ± 0.06 V (PAL) Menu setting: 1) VIDEO OUT of SET UP menu ... NTSC (NTSC mode) (This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode, so don’t set the menu setting to “PAL” ) Adjusting method (NTSC): Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 012211 80 Change the data and set the3DC5 voltage (A) to the specified value. 4 D C5 Press PAUSE button. Adjusting method (PAL): Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 012211 80 Change the data and set the3DC5 voltage (A)to the specified value. Read the data and this data is4DC5 named DC5. 5 D CD DC5 Press PAUSE button. Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure1211 002001 00 5-38, 3. Bright Adjustment (VF-141 board) Set the D range of the RGB driver used to drive the LCD to the Pedestal specified value. If deviated, the EVF screen will become blackish or saturated (whitish). Mode CAMERA Subject Arbitrary A Pin wa of CN803 (EVF_VG) on Measurement Point FC-85 board Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Pedestal Adjustment Page D 2H C9 (NTSC) Adjustment Address CB (PAL ) Specified Value A = 7.20 ± 0.1 Vp-p A: Between the reversed waveform pedestal and non-reversedwaveform pedestal Menu setting: Fig. 5-1-26 1) VIDEO OUT of SET UP menu ... NTSC (NTSC mode) (This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode, so don’t set the menu setting to “PAL” ) Adjusting method (NTSC): Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 03 Change the data and set the3DC9 voltage (A) to the specified value. 4 D C9 Press PAUSE button. Adjusting method (PAL): Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 03 Change the data and set the3DC9 voltage (A) to the specified value. Read the data and this data is4DC9 named DC9. 5 D CB DC9 Press PAUSE button. Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure15F1 002001 00 5-39, 4. Contrast Adjustment (VF-141 board) Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the speci- fied value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or satu- rated (whitish). 10 steps peak Mode CAMERA Subject Arbitrary A Pin wa of CN803 (EVF_VG) on Measurement Point FC-85 board Pedestal Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope 2H Adjustment Page D CA (NTSC) A: Between the pedestal and 10 steps peak Adjustment Address CC (PAL ) Specified Value A = 2.12 ± 0.1 Vp-p Fig. 5-1-27 Menu setting: 1) VIDEO OUT of SET UP menu ... NTSC (NTSC mode) (This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode, so don’t set the menu setting to “PAL” ) Adjusting method (NTSC): Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 03 Change the data and set the3DCA voltage (A) to the specified value. 4 D CA Press PAUSE button. Adjusting method (PAL): Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 03 Change the data and set the3DCA voltage (A) to the specified value. Read the data and this data is4DCA named DCA. Convert Dref to decimal notation and obtain DCA’. (Note) Calculate using following equations 6 (decimal calculation). DCA’= Dref’– 4 ConvertD7CA ’ to a hexadecimal number, and obtain DCA. (Note) 8 D CC DCA Press PAUSE button. Note: Refer to table 5-2-2. “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion table”. Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure15F1 002001 00 5-40, 5. Backlight Consumption Current Adjustment 6. White Balance Adjustment (VF-141 board) (VF-141 board) Correct the white balance. Set the backlight luminance and color temperature. If deviated, the EVF screen color cannot be reproduced. If deviated, the image may become dark or bright. Mode CAMERA Mode CAMERA Subject Arbitrary Subject Arbitrary Measurement Point Check on the EVF display +Probe: Pin w; of CN803 Measuring Instrument Measurement Point (EVF_BL_4.75 V) on FC-85 board -Probe: Pin ql of CN803 (EVF_BL) Adjustment Page D on FC-85 board Adjustment Address C1, C2 Measuring Instrument Digital voltmeter The EVF screen should not beSpecified Value Adjustment Page D colored. Adjustment Address C6 Adjusting method: Specified Value A = 15.0 ± 1 mV Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjusting method: 1 0 01 01 Order Page Address Data Procedure25F1 021001 013DC1 A8 Press PAUSE button. (Initial25F1 02 C2 78 value) Change the data and set the DC Check that the EVF screen is not3DC6 voltege (A) to the specified value. 4 colored, If not colored, proceed to “Processing after Completing4DC6 Press PAUSE button. Adjustments” C1 Change the data and so that theProcessing after Completing Adjustment: 5 D EVF screen is not colored. C2 Order Page Address Data Procedure (Note) 1 5 F1 00 Note: To write in the non-volatile memory (EEPROM), press2001 00 the PAUSE button each time to set the data. Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure15F1 002001 00 5-41, 1-6. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS [Adjusting connector] Before perform the LCD system adjustments, check that the Most of the measuring points for adjusting the LCD system are specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS” are sat- concentrated in CN803 of the FC-85 board. isfied. Connect the Measuring Instruments via the CPC-12 jig (J-6082- 436-A). Note 1: The back light (fluorescent tube) is driven with high volt- The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN803. age AC power. Therefore, do not touch the back light directly, otherwise you will feel an electric shock. Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name Note 2: Taken an extreme care not to destroy the liquid crystal 1 FDDRF_B 12 LANC_OUT display module by static electricity when replacing it. 2 FDDRF_A 13 MAKER_RECOG Note 3: Set the LCD BRIGHT (Menu display) to the center. 3 INDEX 14 PF7 4 REG_GND 15 TXD 5 N. C. 16 RXD 6 TRACK_00 17 RESET 7 HSY 18 HI_VDD 8 COM 19 EVF_BL+ (N.C.) 9 VG 20 EVF_BL_4.75 (N.C.) 10 HI_UNREG 21 EVF_VG (N.C.) 11 LANC_IN 22 EVF_VCO (N.C.) [LCD type check] By measuring the resistor value between Pin qd of CN803 and Pin 4 of CN803, the type LCD can be discriminated. FC-85 board CN803 Resistor value LCD type 4.7 kΩ TYPE S 47 kΩ TYPE C Volt ohm meter 22 qd pin14pin CPC cover FC-85 board 22 CN803 CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A) Fig. 5-1-28 5-42, Alignment disk (Disk-1, Disk-2) 1. LCD Initial Data Input (A set of alignment disks consists of two disks as a pair.) Disk-1: 8-967-990-01 Mode PLAY (TFD2-1 (+)) (+17.5 µm) Signal Arbitrary Disk-2: 8-967-990-11 (TFD2-2 (–)) (–17.5 µm) Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address D0 to D9, DC to DF [Common signals in the disks] Data Code Signal Adjusting method: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. MVC-001C.JPG Color bars 2) Select page: D, and enter the data given in the following table. MVC-002M.JPG Monoscope MVC-003V.JPG V. COM adjustment signal Note: Press the PAUSE button each time the data are set, as the data are written to non-volatile memory (EEPROM). MVC-004W.JPG 100% white MVC-005H.JPG 50% white Data Address Remark MVC-006T.JPG Stair-step signal of 10 steps TYPE S TYPE C MVC-007R.JPG Red single color D0 A2 B2 Bright adjustment MVC-008G.JPG Green single color D1 70 74 Color adjustment MVC-009B.JPG Blue single color D2 A0 A8 White blance adjustment MVC-010D.JPG Camera color bars D3 7A 7A MVC-011N.JPG Camera monoscope D4 B8 C0 Contrast adjustment D5 B0 54 D range adjustment • Contents of alignment disk-1 (Common signal) + (+17.5 µm alignment) D6 68 8A V-COM level adjustment • Contents of alignment disk-2 D7 6F 6F VCO adjustment (NTSC) (Common signal) + (–17.5 µm alignment) D8 7A 8A V-COM adjustment D9 6E 6E Fixed value DC B9 B5 DD 6F 5F VCO adjustment (PAL) DE 13 13 Fixed value DF 00 00 Processing after Completing Adjustments: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. 5-43, 2. VCO Adjustment (FC-85 Board) 3. D Range Adjustment (FC-85 Board) Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will Set the D range of the LCD driver to the specified value. be blurred. If deviated, the LCD screen will became blackish or saturated (whitish) Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Mode PLAY Measurement Point Pin 7 of CN803 (HSY) Signal Arbitrary Measuring Instrument Frequency counter Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN803 (VG) External trigger: Pin 8 of CN803 Adjustment Page D (COM) Specified Value D7 (NTSC) Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope DD (PAL) Adjustment Page D Specified Value TYPE S: f = 15734 ± 30 Hz (NTSC) Adjustment Address D5 f = 15745 ± 30 Hz (PAL) Specified Value A = 3.62 ± 0.05 Vp-p (TYPE S) TYPE C: A = 2.50 ± 0.05 Vp-p (TYPE C) f = 15734 ± 30 Hz (NTSC) f = 15945 ± 30 Hz (PAL) Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Menu setting: 1 0 01 01 1) VIDEO OUT of SET UP menu... NTSC (NTSC mode) (This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode, so don't25F1 03 set the menu setting to “PAL”) Change the data and set the3DD5 voltage (A) to the specified value. Adjusting method: 4 D D5 Press PAUSE button. Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 01 Processing after Completing Adjustment: 2 5 F0 01 Order Page Address Data Procedure Change the data and set the15F1 003DD7 frequency (f) to the NTSC specified2001 00 value. 4 D D7 Press PAUSE button. Change the data and set the Pedestal4DDD frequency (f) to the PAL specified value. 5 D DD Press PAUSE button. Processing after Completing Adjustment:

A

Order Page Address Data Procedure15F0 002001 00 Pedestal 2H A: Pedestal level difference between 1H period and previous 1H period. Fig. 5-1-29 5-44, 4. Bright Adjustment (FC-85 Board) 5. Contrast Adjustment (FC-85 Board) Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the speci- Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the speci- fied value. fied value. If deviated, the LCD screen image will be blackish or saturated If deviated, the LCD screen image will be blackish or saturated (whitish). (whitish). Mode PLAY Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN803 (VG) Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN803 (VG) External trigger: Pin 8 of CN803 External trigger: Pin 8 of CN803 (COM) (COM) Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page D Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address D0 Adjustment Address D4 Specified Value A = 2.15 ± 0.05 Vp-p (TYPE S) Specified Value A = 3.17 ± 0.07 Vp-p (TYPE S) A = 1.28 ± 0.05 Vp-p (TYPE C) A = 2.35 ± 0.07 Vp-p (TYPE C) Adjusting method: Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 011001 012210 0125F1 0335F1 03 Change the data and set the3DD4 Change the data and set the voltage (A) to the specified value. 4 D D0 voltage (A) to the specified value. 4 D D4 Press PAUSE button. 5 D D0 Press PAUSE button. Processing after Completing Adjustment: Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure15F1 0015F1 002001 002210 003001 00 10 steps peak GAMMA1 limiter level

A A

Pedestal 2H Pedestal 2H A: Between the pedestal and 10 steps peak A: Between the pedestal and GAMMA1 Fig. 5-1-31 limiter level Fig. 5-1-30 5-45, 6. Color Adjustment (FC-85 Board) 7. V-COM Level Adjustment (FC-85 Board) Set the color saturation to the standard value. Set the common electrode drive signal level of LCD to the speci- If, deviated, the color will be dark or light. fied value. Mode PLAY Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN803 (VG) Measurement Point Pin 8 of CN803 (COM) External trigger: Pin 8 of CN803 Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope (COM) Adjustment Page D Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Address D6 Adjustment Page D Specified Value A = 6.50 ± 0.05 Vp-p (TYPE S) Adjustment Address D1 A = 5.65 ± 0.05 Vp-p (TYPE C) Specified Value A = 480 ± 50 mVp-p (TYPE S) A = 360 ± 50 mVp-p (TYPE C) Adjusting method: Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedur1001 01 Order Page Address Data Procedure25F1 031001 01 Change the data and set the25F1 043DD6 VCOM signal level (A) to the Change the data and set the3DD1 specified value. voltage (A) to the specified value. 4 D D6 Press PAUSE button. 4 D D1 Press PAUSE button. Processing after Completing Adjustment: Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedur Order Page Address Data Procedure15F1 0015F1 002001 002001 00 White 100% GreenAA2H Fig. 5-1-33 2H A: Between the white 100% (Reference level) and green Fig. 5-1-32 5-46, 8. V-COM Adjustment (FC-85 Board) 9. White Balance Adjustment (FC-85 Board) Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to Correct the white balance. the specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen color cannot be reproduced. If deviated, the LCD display will be move, producing flicker and conspicuous vertical lines. Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Mode PLAY Measurement Point Check on LCD screen Signal Arbitrary Measuring Instrument Measurement Point Check on LCD screen Adjustment Page D Measuring Instrument Adjustment Address D2, D3 Adjustment Page D Specified Value LCD screen must not be colored Adjustment Address D8 Specified Value The brightness difference Note: Check the white balance only when replacing the follow- between the section-A and ing parts. section-B is minimum If necessary, adjust them. 1. LCD panel Adjusting method: 2. Light induction plate Order Page Address Data Procedure 3. IC9021001 01 Adjusting method: 2 5 F1 02 Order Page Address Data Procedure3210 021001 01 Change the data so that the4DD8 brightness of the section A and25F1 02 section B is equal. D2 A8 Press PAUSE button. (Initial5DD8 Press PAUSE button. 3 D value)D3 80 (Note 2) Processing after Completing Adjustment: Check that the LCD screen is not 4 colored, If not colored, proceed toOrder Page Address Data Procedure “Processing after Completing15F1 00 Adjustments” 2 2 10 00 D2 Change the data and so that the5D3001 00 LCD screen is not colored.D3 (Note 2) Note 2: To write in the non-volatile memory (EEPROM), press the PAUSE button each time to set the data. B A Processing after Completing Adjustment: A B Order Page Address Data Procedure15F1 00BA2001 00ABFig. 5-1-34 5-47, 1-7. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS Adjusting method: 1. Battery Down Adjustment Order Page Address Data Procedure Set the battery end voltage. If the voltage is incorrect, the life of battery will shorten. 1 0 01 01 The image at the battery end will also be rough. Decrease the output voltage 2 of the regulated power supply Mode CAMERA so that digital voltmeter Subject Arbitrary display is 5.55 ± 0.01 Vdc. Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 2, Read the data and this data is3 2 52 address: 52 named Dref. Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commamder4D90 Dref Press PAUSE button. Adjustment Page D Convert Dref to decimal 5 notation and obtain Dref’. Adjustment Address 90 to 94 (Note) Calculate D91’, D92’, D93’and Connection: D94’using following equa- 1) Connect the regulated power supply and the digital voltmeter tions (decimal calculation). to the battery terminal as shown in Fig. 5-1-35. 6 D91’= Dref’ + 5 D92’= Dref’ + 23 Preparations before adjustment: D93’= Dref’ + 44 1) Adjust the output voltage of the regulated power supply so D94’= Dref’ + 55 that the digital voltmeter display is 6.1 ± 0.1 Vdc. 2) Turn on the HOLD switch of the adjusting remote commander. Convert D91’, D92’, D93’and 3) Turn on the power supply. D94’to a hexadecimal number,7 4) Set the CAMERA mode. and obtain D91, D92, D93 and D94. (Note) 8 D 91 D91 Press PAUSE button. 9 D 92 D92 Press PAUSE button. 10 D 93 D93 Press PAUSE button. 11 D 94 D94 Press PAUSE button. Note: Refer to table 5-2-2 “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion table”. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 00 Regulated power supply 5.55 ± 0.01 Vdc Digital voltmeter Power cord (J-6082-223-A) Fig. 5-1-35 5-48, 2. ZOOM Center Adjustment 3. Eye Sensor Adjustment Set normal position (center value) of ZOOM lever. Mode CAMERA Mode CAMERA Subject White chart (30 cm × 30 cm) Subject Arbitrary Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 2, Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 2 address: 82 address: 5C (Note 2) Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commamder Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander Adjustment Page D Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address EC Adjustment Address 89 Adjusting method: Note 1: Before adjustment, make sure that the ZOOM lever is in Order Page Address Data Procedure mechanical center position. Note 2: Displayed data of page: 2, address: 5C of the adjusting1001 01 remote commander. 2 Set the white chart. (10 cm from 2:XX:5C the front of the EVF) Displayed data Read the data and this data is3282 named Dref. Convert Dref to decimal notation Adjusting method: 4 and obtain Dref’. (Note) Order Page Address Data Procedure Calculate using following equations1001 01 5 (decimal calculation). Read the data and this data is DEC’= Dref’ – 16225C named Dref. Convert DEC’ to a hexadecimal6 Check the data. number, and obtain DEC. (Note) 5D to 99: Normal7DEC DEC Press PAUSE button. 3 2 5C 00 to 5C and 9A to FF: Note: Refer to table 5-2-2 “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion Defective table”. Press PAUSE button. 4 D 89 D89 (See table below) Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure Dref D891001 00 5D to 6B 6C 6C to 8A Dref 8B to 99 8A Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 00 5-49, 4. Eye Sensor Check 5. Alignment Check (FDD Unit) Confirm that the FDD alignment is within the specifications. If Mode CAMERA deviated, reading and writing data from and to floppy disk be- Subject White chart (30 cm × 30 cm) come impossible. Or compatibility of floppy disk with other machines can be lost. Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 2, address: 41 Mode PLAY Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commamder Signal Alignment disks (TFD2-1 (+)) and (TFD2-2 (–)): Checking method: Arbitrary signal Order Page Address Data Procedure Measurement Point Check on LCD screen1001 01 Measuring Instrument Set the white chart. (15 cm from 2 Specified Value The playback pictures should be the front of the EVF) normal3241 Check the data changes to “00”. Set the white chart. (8 cm from Checking method: the front of the EVF) 1) Disconnect the adjusting remote commander. 2) Insert the alignment disk TFD2-1 (+) (+17.5 um). 5 2 41 Check the data changes to “04”. 3) Playback arbitrary signal and check that the playback picture is normal. Processing after Completing Adjustments: 4) Insert the alignment disk TFD2-2 (–) (–17.5 um). 5) Playback arbitrary signal and check that the playback picture Order Page Address Data Procedure is normal. 1 0 01 00 5-50, 5-2. SERVICE MODE • Changing the address 2-1. ADJUSTING REMOTE COMMANDER The address increases when the FF (M) button is pressed, The adjusting remote commander is used for changing the calcu- and decreases when the REW (M) button is pressed. There lation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The adjust- are altogether 256 addresses, from 00 to FF. ing remote commander performs bi-directional communication • Changing the data (Data setting) with the unit using the remote commander signal line (LANC). The data increases when the PLAY (N) button is pressed, The resultant data of this bi-directional communication is written and decreases when the STOP (x) button is pressed. There in the non-volatile memory. are altogether 256 data, from 00 to FF. • Writing the adjustment data 1. Used the Adjusting Remote Commander The PAUSE button must be pressed to write the adjustment 1) Connect the adjusting remote commander to the CN803 on data in the nonvolatile memory. (The new adjustment data the FC-85 board via CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A). will not be recorded in the nonvolatile memory if this step is 2) Adjust the HOLD switch of the adjusting remote commander not performed) to “HOLD” (SERVICE position). 3) Turn on the power with the POWER switch of the unit. 2. Precautions upon Using the Adjusting Remote If it has been properly connected, the LCD on the adjusting re- Commander mote commander will display as shown in Fig. 5-2-1. Mishandling of the adjusting remote commander may erase the correct adjustment data at times. To prevent this, it is recommended that all adjustment data be noted down before beginning adjust- ments and new adjustment data after each adjustment. 0 : 00 : 00 Page Data Address Fig. 5-2-1 4) Operate the adjusting remote commander as follows. • Changing the page The page increases when the EDIT SEARCH + button is pressed, and decreases when the EDIT SEARCH – button is pressed. There are altogether 16 pages, from 0 to F. Hexadecimal0123456789ABCDEFnotation LCD Display0123456789AbcdEFDecimal notation0123456789101112131415 conversion value Table 5-2-1 5-51, 2-2. DATA PROCESS The calculation of the adjusting remote commander display data (hexadecimal notation) are required for obtaining the adjustment data of some adjustment items. In this case, after converting the hexadecimal notation to decimal notation, calculate and convert the result to hexadecimal notation, and use it as the adjustment data. Table 5-2-2. indicates the hexadecimal notation- the deci- mal notation, calculation table. Hexadecimal nontation-Decimal notation 2 ↓ The lower digits of the0123456789ABCDEFhexadecimal notation The upper digits of the (A) (b) (c) (d) (E) (F) hexadecimal notation0012345678910 11 12 13 14 15 1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 2 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 4 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 5 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 6 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 7 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 8 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 9 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 A (A) 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 1→ B (b) 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 C (c) 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 D (d) 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 E (E) 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 F (F) 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 Note : ( ) indicate the adjusting remote control unit display. (Example) In the case that the adjusting remote control unit display are BD (bd). As the upper digit of the hexadecimal notation is B (b), and the lower digit is D (d), the intersection “189” of the1 and 2 in the above table is the decimal notation to be calculated. Table 5-2-2 5-52, 2-3. SERVICE MODE 3. Switch Check (1) 1. Setting the Test Mode Page 2 Address 43 Page D Address 10 Bit Function When bit value=1 When bit value=0 Data Function 0 XPOWER SW OFF ON 00 Normal (PK-55 board S703) 01 Forced CAMERA mode power ON 1 XCAM/PLAY SW PLAY CAMERA 02 Forced PLAY mode power ON (PK-55 board S707) 03 Forced MOVIE mode power ON SHUTTR SW 2 (CONTROL SWITCH OFF ON • Before setting the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: BLOCK S001) 01. • For page D, the data set is recorded in the non-volatile memory XSHUTTER LOCK SW by pressing the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote com- 3 (CONTROL SWITCH OFF ON mander. In this case, take note that the test mode will not be BLOCK S001) exited even when the main power is turned off. 4 MEMORY STICK OUT IN • After completing adjustments/repairs, be sure to return the data IN SW (MS Socket) of this address to “00”, and press the PAUSE button of the ad- 5 justing remote commander. Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. 7 XSTILL/MOVIE SW MOVIE STILL 2. Bit Value Discrimination (PK-55 board S709) Bit values must be discriminated using the display data of the ad- justing remote commander for following items. Use the table be- Using method: low to discriminate if the bit value is “1” or “0”. 1) Select page: 2, address: 43. 2) By discriminating the bit value of dispaly data, the state of the Display on the adjustilng remote commander switches can be discriminated. 4. Switch Check (2) 0 : 00 : 00 Page 2 Address 48 Address Bit Function When bit value=1 When bit value=0 Page bit3 to bit0 discrimination DISK/XMS SW MEMORY 0 FLOPPY DISK bit7 to bit4 discrimination (FC-85 board S401) STICK Display on the Bit values Using method: Adjusting bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 1) Select page: 2, address: 48. remote or or or or 2) By discriminating the bit value of dispaly data, the state of the commander bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 switches can be discriminated. 0000010001200103001140100501016011070111A8100091001A(A) 1010B(b) 1011C(c) 1100D(d) 1101BE(E) 1110F(F) 1111Example: If “8E” is displayed on the adjusting remote com- mander, the bit values for bit7 to bit4 are shown in the A column, and the bit values for bit3 to bit0 are shown in the B column. 5-53, 5. Switch Check (3) Page 2 Address 54 to 59 Using method: 1) Select page: 2, addresses: 54 to 59. 2) By discriminating the dispaly data, the pressed key can be discriminated. Data Address 00 to 12 13 to 3A 3B to 62 63 to 87 88 to B3 B4 to D5 D6 to FF 54 MACRO FOCUS (KEY AD0) (CF-83 board) (CF-83 board) (IC404 uk) (S401) (S402) 55 CONTROL DOWN CONTROL UP DISPLAY VOLUME+ VOLUME– LCD ON/OFF (KEY AD1) (PK-55 board) (PK-55 board) (PK-55 board) (PK-55 board) (PK-55 board) (PK-55 board) (IC404 ul) (S701) (S701) (S702) (S704) (S706) (S708) 56 CONTROL RIGHT CONTROL LEFT CONTROL SET FLASH (KEY AD2) (PK-55 board) (PK-55 board) (PK-55 board) (PK-55 board) (IC404 i;) (S701) (S701) (S701) (S705) 57 STEADY SHOT (KEY AD3) (CF-83 board) (IC404 ia) (S403) 58 PROGRAM AE+ PROGRAM AE– PROGRAM AE WHITE BALANCE ONE-PUSH SPOT METER (KEY AD4) (AE-25 board) (AE-25 board) (AE-25 board) (AE-25 board) WHITE BALANCE (AE-25 board) (IC404 is) (S356) (S355) (S354) (S353) (AE-25 board) (S351) (S352) 59 OPEN (KEY AD5) (FLASH) (IC404 id) (FLASH UNIT) 6. LED Check Page 2 Address 06 Data 02 Using method: 1) Select page: 2, address: 06, and set data: 02. 2) Check that all LED except for the ACCESS LED are lit. 3) Select page: 2, address: 06, and set data: 00. 7. Self Diagnosis Code Display Code Countermeasure Cause Caution Display During Error Change the disk and turn off the main C:32:01 Defective floppy disk. DRIVE ERROR power then back on. • The type of floppy disk that cannot be Replace the floppy disk or “Memory used by this machine, is inserted. C:13:01 Stick”. (Such as 2DD) DISK ERROR Format the floppy disk or “Memory Stick” • Data is damaged. MEMORY STICK ERROR with the MVC-FD97. • Unformatted disk or “Memory Stick” is inserted. Flash LED Checking of flash unit or replacement of Abnormality when flash is being E:91:01 Flash display flash unit charged. *1 Flashing at 3.2 Hz E:61:00 Checking of lens drive circuit When failed in the focus initialization. — E61:10 Note : The error code is cleared if the battery is removed, except defective flash, unit. *1: When the flash charging failed, Page: D, Address: 67, Data: 04 are written. After repair, be sure to write Page: D, Address: 67, Data: 00. [Power supplying Method] Use the AC power adaptor (AC-L10A) when supplying the power to this set. 55-5-544 E,

MVC-FD97 SECTION 6 REPAIR PARTS LIST

6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are NOTE: critical for safety. • -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they may • The mechanical parts with no reference number in Replace only with part number speci- have some difference from the original one. the exploded views are not supplied. fied. • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are • Accessories are given in the last of the electrical Les composants identifiés par une seldom required for routine service. Some delay parts list. marque 0 sont critiquens pour la should be anticipated when ordering these items. sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié. 6-1-1. MAIN SECTION222Cabinet (rear) block assembly(See page 6-8.) Top cabinet block assembly (See page 6-2.) 2252Cabinet (front) block assembly (See page 6-6.) Lens complete assembly (See page 6-4.) 2 63 FDD block assembly 7 (See page 6-7.) Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 1 1-500-226-41 BEAD, FERRITE 5 1-960-553-11 HARNESS (FU-54) 2 3-968-729-91 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2 6 1-960-552-11 HARNESS (FU-53) 3 3-968-729-51 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2 7 A-7074-794-A FU-153 BOARD, COMPLETE 4 1-678-325-11 FP-171 FLEXIBLE BOARD 6-1, 6-1-2. TOP CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY EVF block assembly 61 not (See page 6-3.) supplied 66 57 52 not supplied MIC901 not supplied 74 73 67 60 56 52 52 52 71 58 57 55 70 69 52 56 52 52 not 53 supplied 57 52 The components identified by Les composants identifiés par une mark 0 or dotted line with marque 0 sont critiques pour la mark 0 are critical for safety. sécurité. Replace only with part num- Ne les remplacer que par une pièce ber specified. portant le numéro spécifié. Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 051 1-476-559-11 FLASH UNIT 64 3-067-469-01 SHOE, ACCESSORY 52 3-948-339-61 TAPPING 65 3-062-299-01 SHEET, MICROPHONE * 53 3-063-352-01 SHEET (ST) 66 A-7074-799-A MA-404 BOARD, COMPLETE 54 X-3950-615-1 BLIND ASSY 67 1-678-328-11 FP-174 FLEXIBLE BOARD 55 X-3950-613-1 ST ASSY 68 3-060-898-11 BUTTON, AE 56 3-713-791-51 SCREW (M1.7X3.5), TAPPING, P2 69 A-7074-800-A AE-25 BOARD, COMPLETE 57 3-968-729-91 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2 * 70 3-062-816-01 SHEET, WATERPROOF 58 3-060-871-01 BASE, TILT 71 X-3951-507-1 CABINET ASSY, TOP 59 X-3951-508-1 GRILLE ASSY, MICROPHONE 72 3-067-471-01 STOPPER (H), SHOE 60 1-418-896-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL 73 3-060-868-11 BUTTON, OPEN 61 3-060-905-01 HOLDER (360), SW 74 3-062-824-01 SPRING, OPEN 62 X-3951-511-1 CABINET (UPPER) ASSY, ST MIC901 1-542-428-11 MICROPHONE UNIT 63 3-067-187-01 ACE, PLATE SCREW (M2) LOCK 6-2, 6-1-3. EVF BLOCK ASSEMBLY 106 107 LCD902 not supplied 112 111 Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 101 1-678-327-12 FP-173 FLEXIBLE BOARD 108 3-060-836-11 KNOB, VISIBILITY ADJUSTMENT 102 3-060-922-01 LID, VF * 109 3-058-232-01 CUSHION (1) (97), LCD 103 A-7074-453-A VF-143 BOARD, COMPLETE * 110 3-058-234-02 CUSHION (2) (97), LCD 104 X-3950-617-1 LENS ASSY, VF 111 3-058-233-01 ILLUMINATOR (97), BL 105 X-3951-509-1 CABINET ASSY, VF 112 3-948-339-61 TAPPING 106 3-060-921-01 ARM, VISIBILITY ADJUSTMENT LCD902 8-753-028-54 LCX033AN-1 107 3-950-044-01 RING, O 6-3, 6-1-4. LENS COMPLETE ASSEMBLY 157 158 154 154 Lens block assembly(See page 6-5.) 156 159 167 154 161 155 162 J001 157 151 162 Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 151 X-3950-618-1 CABINET (LB) ASSY 161 1-678-330-11 FP-177 FLEXIBLE BOARD 152 3-060-893-01 COVER, DC IN 162 3-968-729-51 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2 153 3-060-914-01 HOLDER, DC 163 A-7074-793-A VP-55 BOARD, COMPLETE 154 3-948-339-61 TAPPING * 164 3-060-892-01 PLATE, VP FIXED 155 X-3950-611-1 CABINET (VP) ASSY 165 1-678-323-11 FP-169 FLEXIBLE BOARD 156 3-060-854-01 BAND, RING 166 1-678-321-11 FP-166 FLEXIBLE BOARD 157 3-968-729-91 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2 167 1-678-324-11 FP-170 FLEXIBLE BOARD 158 3-060-890-01 CABINET (LT) 168 1-418-068-11 MF BLOCK * 159 3-970-496-01 SHEET, DRUM J001 1-794-045-31 CONNECTOR, DC-IN * 160 3-060-894-01 FRAME, LENS 6-4, 6-1-5. LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY IC101 (Note 1) 205 207 not supplied not supplied (Note 1) Be sure to read “Precuations for Replacement of CCD Imager” on page 4-8 when changing the CCD imager. Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 201 3-709-575-01 VAP ASSY 206 A-7074-792-A CD-311 BOARD, COMPLETE 202 3-709-576-01 LENS ASSY 207 3-947-268-11 TITE (2), +B TAPPING (P) 203 3-058-032-01 ADAPTOR (CL), CCD FITTING 208 1-678-322-11 FP-168 FLEXIBLE BOARD 204 1-758-436-11 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL IC101 A-7031-092-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (Note 1) 205 3-060-714-01 RUBBER (CL), SEAL 6-5, 6-1-6. CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY BT901 274 262 261 264 not 273 265supplied 262 263 267 not 272 supplied 257 259 258 262 268 not supplied 256 269 Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 251 X-3951-506-1 CABINET (FRONT) ASSY * 264 3-058-801-01 SHEET, ST INSULATING 252 3-060-842-02 LID, BATTERY 265 3-736-363-41 TAPPING 253 3-058-748-01 KNOB, B LOCK * 266 3-058-753-01 RETAINER, HINGE 254 3-058-802-01 SPRING, B LOCK 267 X-3950-246-1 HOLDER ASSY, HINGE 255 3-058-749-01 LEVER, B LOCK 268 3-713-790-31 SCREW (M2X8), TAPPING, P3 256 3-968-729-51 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2 269 3-050-468-01 SCREW, TRIPOD 257 3-060-895-01 HOLDER, SS 270 3-060-843-01 PLATE, L FIXED 258 3-060-897-11 BUTTON, MACRO 271 3-966-178-01 SCREW (1.7) 259 3-060-896-11 KNOB, SS 272 3-719-381-01 SCREW (M2X4) 260 3-969-380-01 SPRING, BATTERY 273 1-678-326-11 FP-172 FLEXIBLE BOARD * 261 3-058-746-01 HOLDER, BATTERY 274 A-7074-796-A CF-83 BOARD, COMPLETE 262 3-948-339-61 TAPPING BT901 1-694-297-21 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY 263 3-052-574-01 CLAW, BT LOCK 6-6, 6-1-7. FDD BLOCK ASSEMBLY 303 303 304 (Note 2) CN201 (Note 2) The FD block assembly is a mechanical unit which has completely been adjusted in the factory. So never disassemble the FD block assembly. Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 301 1-772-563-11 DRIVE, FLOPPY DISK (Note 2) 305 A-7096-558-A FC-85 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) 302 3-066-780-11 BRACKET, FC 306 1-680-234-11 FP-335 FLEXIBLE BOARD 303 3-964-010-31 SCREW (M2), 0 PART-NO. P2 MAIN 307 3-066-799-01 BRACKET, USB 304 3-066-806-01 SHEET, LIGHT INTERCEPTION CN201 1-794-962-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE (USB 5P) 6-7, 6-1-8. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY 352 377 LCD901 360 (Note 4) SP901 ND801375 $ 359 361 not supplied 352 352 (Note 3) 362358 363 365 352 378366 355 352 not supplied 369 354 (Note 3) not 380 supplied 353 356 357 370 352 352 not 352 373supplied 351 352 381 ! : BT701 (BATTERY, LITHIUM SECONDARY) Board on the mount position. (See page 4-43.) (Note 3) The eject mechanism portion is a mechanical unit which has completely been adjusted in the factory. So never The components identified by Les composants identifiés par une disassemble the eject mechanism portion. mark 0 or dotted line with marque 0 sont critiques pour la mark 0 are critical for safety. sécurité. (Note 4) About PK-55 board and LCD module, discriminate LCD Replace only with part num- Ne les remplacer que par une pièce type on the machine referring to page 6, and replace ber specified. portant le numéro spécifié. the same type. Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 351 X-3951-505-1 CABINET (REAR) ASSY 370 3-060-931-01 SHAFT, STRAP 352 3-948-339-61 TAPPING 371 3-060-932-01 DAMPER, FRICTION 353 3-067-463-01 CABINET, SIDE 372 3-060-927-11 COVER, AV JACK 354 3-060-886-01 SHEET METAL (L), STRAP 373 3-067-467-01 SHEET METAL, AV 355 3-067-464-01 LID, MS 374 1-678-338-11 FP-175 FLEXIBLE BOARD 356 X-3951-483-1 HINGE ASSY, MS 375 X-3951-612-1 CASE ASSY, Z SHIELD 357 3-060-848-01 SHEET METAL (R), STRAP 376 A-7074-797-A PK-55 BOARD, COMPLETE (TYPE S) (Note 4) 358 3-058-784-01 RETAINER, LOCK BUTTON 376 A-7074-798-A PK-55 BOARD, COMPLETE (TYPE C) (Note 4) 359 3-066-788-21 KNOB, EJECT 377 3-067-461-01 PLATE, BL FIXED 360 3-058-783-11 BUTTON, LOCK 378 3-066-805-11 LID, CPC 361 3-058-785-01 SPRING, LOCK BUTTON 379 1-678-329-21 FP-176 FLEXIBLE BOARD 362 3-067-468-01 RETAINER, MODE SELECTION 380 3-355-424-21 SCREW, TAPPING 363 3-067-470-01 COVER (H), ACC JACK 381 3-060-839-01 RETAINER, P KNOB 364 3-060-901-01 SHEET METAL, SELECTION CLICK LCD901 1-803-858-21 INDICATOR MODULE LIQUID CRYSTAL (TYPE S) 365 X-3951-545-1 MODE SELECTION KNOB (H) ASSY (SERVICE) (Note 4) LCD901 1-803-860-21 INDICATOR MODULE LIQUID CRYSTAL (TYPE C) 366 3-067-460-01 COVER, USB JACK (Note 4) 367 3-066-776-21 KNOB, FUNCTION 368 3-066-777-01 SPRING, COMPRESSION 0ND801 1-517-751-21 TUBE, FLUORESCENT,COLD CATHODE 369 3-060-838-11 KNOB, POWER SP901 1-505-862-41 SPEAKER (2.0cm) 6-8,

AE-25 CD-311

6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST NOTE: • Due to standardization, replacements in the • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they The components identified by parts list may be different from the parts speci- are seldom required for routine service. mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. fied in the diagrams or the components used Some delay should be anticipated when order- Replace only with part number on the set. ing these items. specified. • -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they • SEMICONDUCTORS Les composants identifiés par une may have some difference from the original In each case, u: µ, for example: marque 0 sont critiquens pour la one. uA.: µA.uPA.: µPA.sécurité. • RESISTORS uPB.: µPB.uPC.: µPC.Ne les remplacer que par une pièce All resistors are in ohms. uPD.: µPD.portant le numéro spécifié. METAL: Metal-film resistor. • CAPACITORS METAL OXIDE: Metal oxide-film resistor. uF: µF When indicating parts by reference F: nonflammable • COILS number, please include the board. uH: µH • Abbreviation About PK-55 board and LCD module, dis- AUS : Australian model J : Japanese model criminate LCD type on the machine referring CND : Canadian model KR : Korea model to page 6, and replace the same type. HK : Hong Kong model Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark A-7074-800-A AE-25 BOARD, COMPLETE C152 1-104-847-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 4V ********************* C153 1-104-847-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 4V (Ref.No.: 2,000 Series) C156 1-164-245-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF 10% 25V C157 1-164-245-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF 10% 25V < CONNECTOR > C158 1-164-245-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF 10% 25V CN351 1-766-335-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 5P C159 1-164-245-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF 10% 25V C160 1-110-666-11 ELECT CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V < RESISTOR > C161 1-110-666-11 ELECT CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V C162 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V R351 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R352 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W C163 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V R353 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W C164 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V R354 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W C165 1-104-852-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V R355 1-218-956-11 RES-CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W < CONNECTOR > < SWITCH > CN101 1-691-356-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 18P S351 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (SPOT METER) CN102 1-573-347-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 7P S352 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (ONE-PUSH WHITE BALANCE) < IC > S353 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (WHITE BALANCE) S354 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (PROGRAM AE) IC101 A-7031-092-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) S355 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (PROGRAM AE (-)) IC150 8-759-489-19 IC uPC6756GR-8JG-E2 S356 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (PROGRAM AE (+)) < COIL > L101 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH A-7074-792-A CD-311 BOARD, COMPLETE L150 1-412-951-11 INDUCTOR 10uH *********************** (Ref.No.: 2,000 Series) < TRANSISTOR > (IC101 is not included in this complete board) Q101 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO < CAPACITOR > Q102 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR 2SC4178-F13F14-T1 C101 1-113-985-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 20V < RESISTOR > C102 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V C103 1-115-339-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 50V R101 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W C104 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V R102 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 C105 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V R103 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R104 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W C106 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V R105 1-216-798-11 RES-CHIP 12 5% 1/16W C107 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C108 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V R106 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W C109 1-162-915-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10PF 0.5PF 50V R107 1-218-981-11 RES-CHIP 220K 5% 1/16W C150 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V R108 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R109 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 C151 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V R110 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W (Note) Be sure to read “Note on the CCD Imager Replacement” on page 4-8 when changing the CCD imager. 6-9,

CD-311 CF-83

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark R112 1-216-296-11 SHORT 0 R150 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R151 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R152 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R153 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R154 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R155 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R156 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R157 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R158 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R159 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W R160 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W < SENSOR > SE150 1-803-042-31 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (PITCH SENSOR) SE151 1-803-042-41 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (YAW SENSOR) A-7074-796-A CF-83 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** (Ref.No.: 2,000 Series) < CONNECTOR > CN401 1-766-336-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P < RESISTOR > R401 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W < SWITCH > S401 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (MACRO) S402 1-762-741-11 SWITCH, SLIDE (FOCUS) S403 1-762-741-11 SWITCH, SLIDE (STEADY SHOT)

Electrical parts list of the FC-85 board is not

shown.

Pages 6-11 to 6-18 are not shown.

6-10,

FU-153 MA-404 PK-55 (TYPE C)

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark A-7074-794-A FU-153 BOARD, COMPLETE C305 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V ********************** C306 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V (Ref.No.: 2,000 Series) C307 1-119-749-11 TANTAL. CHIP 33uF 20% 4V < CAPACITOR > < CONNECTOR > C001 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V CN301 1-766-340-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 10P CN303 1-766-336-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P < CONNECTOR > CN305 1-784-342-21 HOUSING, CONNECTOR 2P CN306 1-766-335-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 5P * CN001 1-580-056-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (SMD) 3P * CN002 1-580-057-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (SMD) 4P < IC > CN003 1-770-622-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 5P CN004 1-770-629-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 12P IC301 8-759-339-63 IC NJM2118V-TE2 < DIODE > < COIL > D001 8-719-158-49 DIODE MA8120-TX L301 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH D002 8-719-027-76 DIODE 1SS357-TPH3 D003 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 < RESISTOR > < FUSE > R301 1-218-952-11 RES-CHIP 820 5% 1/16W R302 1-218-944-11 RES-CHIP 180 5% 1/16W 0F001 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V) R303 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W 0F002 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V) R304 1-218-954-11 RES-CHIP 1.2K 5% 1/16W 0F003 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V) 0F004 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V) 0F005 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V) A-7074-798-A PK-55 BOARD, COMPLETE (TYPE C) ***************************** < FERRITE BEAD > (Ref.No.: 2,000 Series) FB001 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH < BATTERY > FB002 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH FB003 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH BT701 1-756-102-11 BATTERY, LITHIUM SECONDARY < LINE FILTER > < CAPACITOR > LF001 1-411-957-11 FILTER, COMMON MODE C705 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V C706 1-115-467-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 10V < TRANSISTOR > C710 1-125-891-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 10V C711 1-164-870-11 CERAMIC CHIP 68PF 5% 16V Q001 8-729-046-77 TRANSISTOR SI4963DY-T1 C801 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V Q002 8-729-804-41 TRANSISTOR 2SB1122-ST-TD Q003 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO C802 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V Q004 8-729-047-68 TRANSISTOR SSM3K03FE (TPL3) C803 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V Q005 8-729-047-68 TRANSISTOR SSM3K03FE (TPL3) C804 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C805 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V < RESISTOR > C806 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V R001 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W C807 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V R002 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W C808 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V R004 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W C810 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V R005 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W C811 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V R006 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W C812 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V R008 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W C813 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V R019 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W C814 1-165-112-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.33uF 20% 10V R020 1-216-150-91 RES-CHIP 10 5% 1/8W C815 1-165-112-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.33uF 20% 10V R021 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 C816 1-165-112-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.33uF 20% 10V C851 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V A-7074-799-A MA-404 BOARD, COMPLETE C852 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V *********************** C853 1-165-128-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 16V (Ref.No.: 2,000 Series) C854 1-135-149-21 TANTALUM CHIP 2.2uF 20% 10V C855 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 16V < CAPACITOR > C856 1-164-856-81 CERAMIC CHIP 18PF 5% 16V C303 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C857 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V C304 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V C858 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V The components identified by Les composants identifiés par une mark 0 or dotted line with marque 0 sont critiques pour la mark 0 are critical for safety. sécurité. Replace only with part num- Ne les remplacer que par une pièce 6-19 ber specified. portant le numéro spécifié.,

PK-55 (TYPE C)

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark C859 1-164-860-11 CERAMIC CHIP 27PF 5% 16V FB789 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH C861 1-113-682-11 TANTAL. CHIP 33uF 20% 10V FB790 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH C862 1-115-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10V FB791 1-469-324-21 FERRITE 0uH C863 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V FB801 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH C864 1-164-657-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF 10% 50V FB802 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH C865 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V FB803 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH 0C866 1-131-959-91 CERAMIC CHIP 12PF 10% 3KV C901 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V < IC > C902 1-107-687-11 TANTAL. CHIP 3.3uF 20% 20V IC702 8-759-572-54 IC TA6009FN (EL) C903 1-115-467-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 10V IC801 8-759-364-05 IC MB40D001PFV-G-BND-ER C904 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V IC802 8-759-539-27 IC IR3Y37A4 C905 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V IC803 8-759-196-97 IC TC7SH32FU-TE85R C906 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V IC851 8-759-521-35 IC TL5001CDR C907 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 16V IC852 8-759-710-82 IC NJM2406F-TE2 C908 1-164-872-11 CERAMIC CHIP 82PF 5% 16V IC901 8-759-524-61 IC CM7018L3-T4 C909 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V IC902 8-759-327-01 IC NJM062V (TE2) C911 1-164-739-11 CERAMIC CHIP 560PF 5% 50V C912 1-164-872-11 CERAMIC CHIP 82PF 5% 16V < JACK > C913 1-109-982-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V J781 1-569-950-11 JACK (SMALL TYPE) (AV OUT) C916 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 16V C917 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V < COIL > C918 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 16V C919 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V L702 1-469-527-91 INDUCTOR 47uH L801 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH < CONNECTOR > L802 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH L851 1-469-524-91 INDUCTOR 4.7uH CN701 1-778-637-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 50P L852 1-424-674-11 INDUCTOR 22uH CN702 1-784-342-11 HOUSING, CONNECTOR 2P CN781 1-691-344-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 6P L853 1-419-387-21 INDUCTOR 100uH CN851 1-764-709-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (LIF) 10P L901 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH CN901 1-691-362-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 24P L902 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH L903 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH < DIODE > L904 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH D701 8-719-061-81 DIODE TLYU1002 (TPX1, SONY) L905 1-412-949-21 INDUCTOR 6.8uH D702 8-719-061-81 DIODE TLYU1002 (TPX1, SONY) D703 8-719-064-05 DIODE TLGU1002 (TPX1, SONY) < TRANSISTOR > D782 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 D783 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 Q851 8-729-042-72 TRANSISTOR UN9214J- (K8).SO Q852 8-729-042-59 TRANSISTOR UN9112J- (K8).SO D784 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0 Q853 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO D785 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0 Q854 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO D786 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 Q855 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO D787 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 D788 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 Q856 8-729-823-84 TRANSISTOR FP102-TL Q857 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO D789 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 Q858 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO D790 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 Q859 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO D853 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0 Q860 8-729-039-43 TRANSISTOR FP216-TL D854 8-719-062-44 DIODE PG1112H-TR D902 8-713-102-80 DIODE 1T369-01-T8A Q861 8-729-042-59 TRANSISTOR UN9112J- (K8).SO Q901 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO D903 8-719-976-96 DIODE MA8047-H-TX Q902 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO Q903 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO < FERRITE BEAD > Q904 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO FB781 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH < RESISTOR > FB782 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH FB783 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH R703 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 FB784 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH R708 1-218-951-11 RES-CHIP 680 5% 1/16W FB785 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH R712 1-218-946-11 RES-CHIP 270 5% 1/16W R713 1-208-912-11 METAL CHIP 11K 0.5% 1/16W FB786 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH R714 1-218-951-11 RES-CHIP 680 5% 1/16W FB787 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH FB788 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH R715 1-218-979-11 RES-CHIP 150K 5% 1/16W The components identified by Les composants identifiés par une mark 0 or dotted line with marque 0 sont critiques pour la mark 0 are critical for safety. sécurité. Replace only with part num- Ne les remplacer que par une pièce 6-20 ber specified. portant le numéro spécifié.,

PK-55 (TYPE C) PK-55 (TYPE S)

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark R716 1-218-956-11 RES-CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W R927 1-208-721-11 METAL CHIP 39K 0.5% 1/16W R717 1-218-956-11 RES-CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W R718 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W R928 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R719 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W R929 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R931 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R720 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R932 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R721 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R933 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R722 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W R723 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R935 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R724 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R936 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R939 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R727 1-216-013-00 METAL CHIP 33 5% 1/10W R940 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R782 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R941 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R787 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R808 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R942 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R809 1-218-966-11 RES-CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W R945 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R948 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R810 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R949 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R812 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R950 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R813 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W R814 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R951 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R817 1-218-962-11 RES-CHIP 5.6K 5% 1/16W R953 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R962 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R818 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W R963 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R820 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R966 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R821 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R853 1-208-703-11 METAL CHIP 6.8K 0.5% 1/16W R967 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R854 1-218-970-11 METAL CHIP 27K 0.5% 1/16W R970 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R974 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R855 1-218-978-11 METAL CHIP 120K 0.5% 1/16W R975 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R856 1-218-950-11 RES-CHIP 560 5% 1/16W R976 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R857 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R858 1-218-950-11 RES-CHIP 560 5% 1/16W R977 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R859 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W < SWITCH > R860 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W R861 1-208-689-11 METAL CHIP 1.8K 0.5% 1/16W S701 1-786-039-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (CONTROL BUTTON) R862 1-208-695-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 0.5% 1/16W S702 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (DISPLAY) R863 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W S703 1-572-467-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (POWER ON/OFF) R864 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W S704 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (VOLUME (+)) S705 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (FLASH) R865 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R866 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W S706 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (VOLUME (-)) R867 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W S707 1-771-331-61 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (PLAY) R868 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W S708 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (LCD ON/OFF) R869 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W S709 1-771-331-81 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (MOVIE) R870 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W < SENSOR > R871 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R872 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W SE701 1-801-868-41 SENSOR, SHOCK R873 1-218-942-11 RES-CHIP 120 5% 1/16W R901 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 < TRANSFORMER > R902 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 0T851 1-435-227-11 TRANSFORMER, INVERTER R904 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R905 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R908 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 A-7074-797-A PK-55 BOARD, COMPLETE (TYPE S) R911 1-218-978-11 RES-CHIP 120K 5% 1/16W ***************************** (Ref.No.: 2,000 Series) R912 1-218-987-11 RES-CHIP 680K 5% 1/16W R913 1-218-976-11 RES-CHIP 82K 5% 1/16W < BATTERY > R916 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R919 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W BT701 1-756-102-11 BATTERY, LITHIUM SECONDARY R920 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W < CAPACITOR > R921 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W R922 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W C705 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V R923 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W C706 1-115-467-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 10V R925 1-208-927-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/16W C710 1-125-891-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 10V The components identified by Les composants identifiés par une mark 0 or dotted line with marque 0 sont critiques pour la mark 0 are critical for safety. sécurité. Replace only with part num- Ne les remplacer que par une pièce 6-21 ber specified. portant le numéro spécifié.,

PK-55 (TYPE S)

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark C711 1-164-870-11 CERAMIC CHIP 68PF 5% 16V D703 8-719-064-05 DIODE TLGU1002 (TPX1, SONY) C801 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V D782 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 D783 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 C802 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V C803 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V D784 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0 C804 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V D785 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0 C805 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V D786 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 C806 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V D787 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 D788 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 C807 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C808 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V D789 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 C810 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V D790 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 C811 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V D853 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0 C812 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V D854 8-719-062-44 DIODE PG1112H-TR D902 8-713-102-80 DIODE 1T369-01-T8A C813 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V C814 1-165-112-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.33uF 20% 10V D903 8-719-976-96 DIODE MA8047-H-TX C815 1-165-112-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.33uF 20% 10V C816 1-165-112-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.33uF 20% 10V < FERRITE BEAD > C851 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V FB781 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH C852 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V FB782 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH C853 1-165-128-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 16V FB783 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH C854 1-135-149-21 TANTALUM CHIP 2.2uF 20% 10V FB784 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH C855 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 16V FB785 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH C856 1-164-856-81 CERAMIC CHIP 18PF 5% 16V FB786 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH C857 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V FB787 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH C858 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V FB788 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH C859 1-164-860-11 CERAMIC CHIP 27PF 5% 16V FB789 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH C861 1-113-682-11 TANTAL. CHIP 33uF 20% 10V FB790 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH C862 1-115-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10V FB791 1-469-324-21 FERRITE 0uH C863 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V FB801 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH C864 1-164-657-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF 10% 50V FB802 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH C865 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V FB803 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH 0C866 1-131-959-91 CERAMIC CHIP 12PF 10% 3KV C902 1-107-687-11 TANTAL. CHIP 3.3uF 20% 20V < IC > C903 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V IC702 8-759-572-54 IC TA6009FN (EL) C904 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V IC801 8-759-364-05 IC MB40D001PFV-G-BND-ER C905 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V IC802 8-759-539-27 IC IR3Y37A4 C906 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V IC803 8-759-196-97 IC TC7SH32FU-TE85R C907 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 16V IC851 8-759-521-35 IC TL5001CDR C908 1-164-872-11 CERAMIC CHIP 82PF 5% 16V IC852 8-759-710-82 IC NJM2406F-TE2 C909 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V IC901 8-759-587-61 IC LZ9GH234 C911 1-164-739-11 CERAMIC CHIP 560PF 5% 50V IC902 8-759-327-01 IC NJM062V (TE2) C912 1-164-872-11 CERAMIC CHIP 82PF 5% 16V C913 1-109-982-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V < JACK > C914 1-113-994-11 TANTAL. CHIP 6.8uF 20% 16V J781 1-569-950-11 JACK (SMALL TYPE) (AV OUT) C915 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C916 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 16V < COIL > C917 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V C918 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 16V L702 1-469-527-91 INDUCTOR 47uH L801 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH < CONNECTOR > L802 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH L851 1-469-524-91 INDUCTOR 4.7uH CN701 1-778-637-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 50P L852 1-424-674-11 INDUCTOR 22uH CN702 1-784-342-11 HOUSING, CONNECTOR 2P CN781 1-691-344-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 6P L853 1-419-387-21 INDUCTOR 100uH CN851 1-764-709-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (LIF) 10P L901 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH CN901 1-691-362-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 24P L902 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH L903 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH < DIODE > L905 1-412-949-21 INDUCTOR 6.8uH D701 8-719-061-81 DIODE TLYU1002 (TPX1, SONY) D702 8-719-061-81 DIODE TLYU1002 (TPX1, SONY) The components identified by Les composants identifiés par une mark 0 or dotted line with marque 0 sont critiques pour la mark 0 are critical for safety. sécurité. Replace only with part num- Ne les remplacer que par une pièce 6-22 ber specified. portant le numéro spécifié.,

PK-55 (TYPE S)

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark < TRANSISTOR > R867 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W R868 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W Q851 8-729-042-72 TRANSISTOR UN9214J- (K8).SO R869 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W Q852 8-729-042-59 TRANSISTOR UN9112J- (K8).SO Q853 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO R870 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W Q854 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO R871 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W Q855 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO R872 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R873 1-218-942-11 RES-CHIP 120 5% 1/16W Q856 8-729-823-84 TRANSISTOR FP102-TL R903 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 Q857 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO Q858 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO R904 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W Q859 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO R905 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W Q860 8-729-039-43 TRANSISTOR FP216-TL R911 1-218-978-11 RES-CHIP 120K 5% 1/16W R912 1-218-987-11 RES-CHIP 680K 5% 1/16W Q861 8-729-042-59 TRANSISTOR UN9112J- (K8).SO R913 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W Q901 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO Q902 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO R916 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W Q903 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO R917 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W Q904 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO R919 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R920 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W < RESISTOR > R921 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W R703 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R922 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W R708 1-218-951-11 RES-CHIP 680 5% 1/16W R923 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R712 1-218-946-11 RES-CHIP 270 5% 1/16W R925 1-208-931-11 METAL CHIP 68K 0.5% 1/16W R713 1-208-912-11 METAL CHIP 11K 0.5% 1/16W R927 1-208-719-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W R714 1-218-951-11 RES-CHIP 680 5% 1/16W R928 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R715 1-218-979-11 RES-CHIP 150K 5% 1/16W R929 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R716 1-218-956-11 RES-CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W R932 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R717 1-218-956-11 RES-CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W R933 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R718 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W R934 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R719 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W R935 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R720 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R936 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R721 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R941 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R722 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W R942 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R723 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R944 1-208-719-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W R724 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R945 1-208-715-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/16W R727 1-216-013-00 METAL CHIP 33 5% 1/10W R946 1-208-719-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W R782 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R947 1-208-715-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/16W R787 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R952 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R808 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R954 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R809 1-218-966-11 RES-CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W R956 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R810 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R957 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R812 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R958 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R813 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W R959 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R814 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R960 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R817 1-218-966-11 RES-CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W R961 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R818 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W R964 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R820 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R968 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R821 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R969 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R853 1-208-703-11 METAL CHIP 6.8K 0.5% 1/16W R971 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R854 1-218-970-11 METAL CHIP 27K 0.5% 1/16W R972 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R855 1-218-978-11 METAL CHIP 120K 0.5% 1/16W R973 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R856 1-218-950-11 RES-CHIP 560 5% 1/16W R977 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R857 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R858 1-218-950-11 RES-CHIP 560 5% 1/16W < SWITCH > R859 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W S701 1-786-039-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (CONTROL BUTTON) R860 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W S702 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (DISPLAY) R861 1-208-689-11 METAL CHIP 1.8K 0.5% 1/16W S703 1-572-467-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (POWER ON/OFF) R862 1-208-695-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 0.5% 1/16W S704 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (VOLUME (+)) R863 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W S705 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (FLASH) R864 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W S706 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (VOLUME (-)) R865 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W S707 1-771-331-61 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (PLAY) R866 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W S708 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (LCD ON/OFF) 6-23,

PK-55 (TYPE S) VF-143

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark S709 1-771-331-81 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (MOVIE) C626 1-113-642-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 10V < SENSOR > C628 1-117-720-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10V C629 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 16V SE701 1-801-868-41 SENSOR, SHOCK 0C630 1-115-464-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 630V < TRANSFORMER > < CONNECTOR > 0T851 1-435-227-11 TRANSFORMER, INVERTER CN501 1-784-421-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 27P CN601 1-750-340-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/EPC (ZIF) 16P A-7074-453-A VF-143 BOARD, COMPLETE < DIODE > ********************** (Ref.No.: 2,000 Series) D501 8-719-060-95 DIODE CL-200IR-X-TSL-BCD (EYE SENSOR LED) < CAPACITOR > D601 8-719-043-70 DIODE MA6S121- (TX) D602 8-713-102-80 DIODE 1T369-01-T8A C501 1-117-919-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V D603 8-719-033-14 DIODE CL-170PG-CD-T C502 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V D604 8-719-056-49 DIODE 1SS370 (TE85L) C503 1-104-913-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 16V C504 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V < IC > C505 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V IC502 8-759-546-65 IC CXA8115AR-T4 C506 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V IC503 8-759-364-05 IC M62376GP-65AD C507 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V IC504 8-759-075-66 IC TA75S01F (TE85R) C508 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V IC601 8-759-097-75 IC MB3789PFV-G-BND-ER C510 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V IC602 8-759-198-34 IC TA75S558F (TE85R) C511 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V IC603 8-752-392-33 IC CXD2458AR-T4 C512 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V IC604 8-759-242-78 IC TC7W02FU (TE12R) C513 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V C514 1-127-760-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V < COIL > C515 1-127-760-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V C516 1-127-760-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V L501 1-414-771-91 INDUCTOR 10uH L502 1-414-771-91 INDUCTOR 10uH C517 1-104-915-11 TANTAL. CHIP 2.2uF 20% 20V L503 1-414-755-11 INDUCTOR 22uH C518 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V L504 1-414-771-91 INDUCTOR 10uH C519 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 16V L601 1-412-033-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 220uH C520 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C521 1-117-919-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V L602 1-414-756-11 INDUCTOR 47uH L603 1-412-946-11 INDUCTOR 3.9uH C601 1-115-467-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 10V L604 1-412-031-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 47uH C602 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V L605 1-412-029-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 10uH C603 1-117-919-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C604 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V < FLUORESCENT INDICATOR > C605 1-104-916-11 TANTAL. CHIP 6.8uF 20% 20V 0ND601 1-517-933-11 FLUORESCENT TUBE (0.44) C606 1-164-939-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 16V C608 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V < TRANSISTOR > C609 1-109-935-11 TANTAL. CHIP 4.7uF 20% 6.3V C610 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V Q501 8-729-040-26 TRANSISTOR CPT-182S-C-TSL-BCD C611 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V (EYE SENSOR) Q502 8-729-049-25 TRANSISTOR 2SC5376F-B (TPL3) C612 1-109-982-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V Q503 8-729-822-05 TRANSISTOR 2SD1622-ST-TD C613 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V Q601 8-729-013-72 TRANSISTOR RN2105-TE85L C614 1-164-878-11 CERAMIC CHIP 150PF 5% 16V Q602 8-729-037-61 TRANSISTOR UN9113J- (K8).SO C615 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C616 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V Q603 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO Q604 8-729-427-72 TRANSISTOR XP4501-TXE C617 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V Q605 8-729-039-24 TRANSISTOR FX216-TL1 C618 1-164-940-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0033uF 10% 16V C619 1-164-874-11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5% 16V < RESISTOR > C620 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C621 1-117-919-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V R501 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R502 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W C622 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V R503 1-216-150-91 RES-CHIP 10 5% 1/8W C623 1-165-112-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.33uF 16V R504 1-218-987-11 RES-CHIP 680K 5% 1/16W C624 1-165-112-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.33uF 16V R505 1-216-019-00 METAL CHIP 56 5% 1/10W C625 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V The components identified by Les composants identifiés par une mark 0 or dotted line with marque 0 sont critiques pour la mark 0 are critical for safety. sécurité. Replace only with part num- Ne les remplacer que par une pièce 6-24 ber specified. portant le numéro spécifié.,

VF-143 VP-55

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark R507 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W A-7074-793-A VP-55 BOARD, COMPLETE R508 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W ********************* R510 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (Ref.No.: 2,000 Series) R513 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W R514 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W < CAPACITOR > R516 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W C201 1-135-149-21 TANTALUM CHIP 2.2uF 20% 10V R517 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W C202 1-135-149-21 TANTALUM CHIP 2.2uF 20% 10V R518 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W C203 1-110-563-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.068uF 10% 16V R519 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W C204 1-110-563-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.068uF 10% 16V R520 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W C205 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V R521 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W C206 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 16V R522 1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W C207 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V R523 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W C208 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 16V R524 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W C209 1-125-891-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 10V R526 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W C210 1-125-891-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 10V R530 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W C211 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V R531 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 C212 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V R532 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 C213 1-135-210-11 TANTALUM CHIP 4.7uF 20% 10V R533 1-218-968-11 RES-CHIP 18K 5% 1/16W C214 1-135-151-21 TANTALUM CHIP 4.7uF 20% 4V R534 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W C215 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V R601 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W C224 1-119-923-81 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10% 10V R602 1-208-941-11 METAL CHIP 180K 0.5% 1/16W C225 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V R603 1-218-974-11 RES-CHIP 56K 5% 1/16W C226 1-119-923-81 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10% 10V R604 1-208-927-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/16W C227 1-164-940-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0033uF 10% 16V R605 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W C228 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V R606 1-218-982-11 RES-CHIP 270K 5% 1/16W C229 1-164-940-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0033uF 10% 16V R607 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W C230 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V R608 1-218-974-11 RES-CHIP 56K 5% 1/16W C231 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V R609 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W C232 1-135-210-11 TANTALUM CHIP 4.7uF 20% 10V R610 1-218-954-11 RES-CHIP 1.2K 5% 1/16W C233 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 16V R611 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W C234 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V R612 1-218-983-11 RES-CHIP 330K 5% 1/16W C235 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V R613 1-218-980-11 RES-CHIP 180K 5% 1/16W C236 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V R614 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W C237 1-135-210-11 TANTALUM CHIP 4.7uF 20% 10V R615 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W C238 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V R616 1-218-979-11 RES-CHIP 150K 5% 1/16W < CONNECTOR > R617 1-218-982-11 RES-CHIP 270K 5% 1/16W R618 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W CN231 1-766-343-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 13P R620 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W CN232 1-766-337-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 7P R621 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W CN234 1-766-336-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P CN235 1-766-335-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 5P R622 1-218-974-11 RES-CHIP 56K 5% 1/16W CN236 1-766-346-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 16P R623 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R624 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W < DIODE > R625 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R626 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W D201 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 R627 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W < FERRITE BEAD > R628 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R629 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W FB201 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH R630 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W FB260 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH R636 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W FB261 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH FB262 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH R637 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W FB263 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH R638 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 FB264 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH < TRANSFORMER > < IC > 0T601 1-435-225-21 TRANSFORMER, INVERTER IC201 8-759-359-49 IC NJM3414AV (TE2) IC202 8-759-359-49 IC NJM3414AV (TE2) IC203 8-759-823-51 IC LB1830M-TLM The components identified by Les composants identifiés par une mark 0 or dotted line with marque 0 sont critiques pour la mark 0 are critical for safety. sécurité. Replace only with part num- Ne les remplacer que par une pièce 6-25 ber specified. portant le numéro spécifié.,

VP-55

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark IC204 8-759-444-87 IC NJM324V (TE2) R232 1-208-943-11 METAL CHIP 220K 0.5% 1/16W IC205 8-759-058-45 IC NJM3403AV (TE2) R233 1-208-935-11 METAL CHIP 100K 0.5% 1/16W R234 1-208-935-11 METAL CHIP 100K 0.5% 1/16W IC206 8-759-478-92 IC TC7SET04FU (TE85R) IC207 8-759-478-92 IC TC7SET04FU (TE85R) R235 1-208-935-11 METAL CHIP 100K 0.5% 1/16W IC208 8-759-248-78 IC MB88102PFV-G-BND-ER R238 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W IC209 8-752-900-84 IC CXP81120-047R-T6 R239 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W IC210 8-759-058-58 IC TC7S04FU (TE85R) R240 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R241 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W < COIL > R242 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W L201 1-412-951-11 INDUCTOR 10uH R243 1-208-935-11 METAL CHIP 100K 0.5% 1/16W L202 1-412-951-11 INDUCTOR 10uH R244 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W L204 1-412-963-11 INDUCTOR 100uH R245 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W L205 1-412-951-11 INDUCTOR 10uH R246 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W L206 1-412-951-11 INDUCTOR 10uH R247 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W L207 1-412-951-11 INDUCTOR 10uH R248 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R249 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W < TRANSISTOR > R250 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R251 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W Q201 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO Q202 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO R252 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W Q203 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO R253 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W Q204 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO R254 1-218-946-11 RES-CHIP 270 5% 1/16W Q205 8-729-420-24 TRANSISTOR 2SB1218A-QRS-TX R255 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R256 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W Q206 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO Q207 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO R257 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W Q208 8-729-013-31 TRANSISTOR 2SA1588-OY-TE85L R258 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 Q209 8-729-420-24 TRANSISTOR 2SB1218A-QRS-TX R259 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 Q210 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO < VIBRATOR > Q211 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO X201 1-579-553-11 VIBRATOR (12MHz) < RESISTOR > R201 1-208-683-11 METAL CHIP 1K 0.5% 1/16W ACCESSORIES R202 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W ************ R203 1-208-683-11 METAL CHIP 1K 0.5% 1/16W R204 1-208-683-11 METAL CHIP 1K 0.5% 1/16W 0 1-475-599-11 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-L10) (EXCEPT KR) R205 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W 0 1-475-599-71 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-L10) (KR) 0 1-569-007-11 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P (E) R206 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W 0 1-569-008-21 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P (E) R207 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W 0 1-696-819-11 CORD, POWER (AUS) R209 1-208-683-11 METAL CHIP 1K 0.5% 1/16W R210 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W 1-757-293-11 CORD, CONNECTION (USB 5P) R211 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W 0 1-769-608-11 CORD, POWER (AEP, E) 0 1-776-985-11 CORD, POWER (KR) R212 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W 0 1-783-374-11 CORD, POWER (UK, HK) R213 1-208-695-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 0.5% 1/16W 1-783-738-11 CORD, CONNECTION (AV CONNECTING 1.5m) R214 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R215 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W 0 1-790-107-22 CORD, POWER (US, CND) R216 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W 0 1-790-732-11 CORD, POWER (J) 3-065-665-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (for SAFETY) R217 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W (JAPANESE) (J) R218 1-208-695-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 0.5% 1/16W 3-066-676-01 SPVD-004 (P) (CD-ROM) R219 1-216-134-00 METAL CHIP 2.2 5% 1/8W (AEP, UK, E, HK, AUS, KR) R220 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W 3-066-677-01 SPVD-004 (I) (CD-ROM) (US, CND, J) R221 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W 3-066-743-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (JAPANESE) (J) R222 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W 3-066-743-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH) R223 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W (US, CND, AEP, UK, E, HK, AUS) R224 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W 3-066-743-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH, GERMAN) R225 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (CND, AEP) R227 1-208-927-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/16W 3-066-743-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH, PORTUGUESE) (AEP, E) R228 1-208-927-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/16W 3-066-743-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN, DUTCH) R231 1-208-943-11 METAL CHIP 220K 0.5% 1/16W (AEP) The components identified by Les composants identifiés par une mark 0 or dotted line with marque 0 sont critiques pour la mark 0 are critical for safety. sécurité. Replace only with part num- Ne les remplacer que par une pièce 6-26 ber specified. portant le numéro spécifié., Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 3-066-743-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONAL CHINESE, SIMPLIFIED CHINESE) (E, HK) 3-066-743-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SWEDISH, RUSSIAN) (AEP) 3-066-743-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC) (E) 3-066-743-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN) (KR) 3-067-797-11 STRING (T), CAP 3-987-015-01 BELT (S), SHOULDER A-7094-140-A BATTERY PACK (NP-330) (US, CND) A-7094-141-B BATTERY PACK (NP-330) (AEP, UK, E, HK, AUS, KR) X-3950-691-1 CAP ASSY, LENS 66-2-277 E, FOR CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION FRAME with a For NTSC mode clear sheet for use. R-Y R MG

YE

B-Y

B CY G

✄ MVC-FD97 For PAL mode R-Y

MG R YE

B-Y

B CY G

MVC-FD97 – 169 – ✄,

MVC-FD97 Sony EMCS Co. Kohda TEC 2001F0500-19-929-887-32 © 2001. 6

– 170 – Published by PV Customer Center,

Reverse 992988732.pdf Revision History

S.M. Rev. Ver. Date History Contents issued 1.0 2001.03 Official Release — — 1.1 2001.06 Correction S.M. correction: Page 5-28 Yes]
15

Similar documents

MVC-FD83/FD88 SERVICE MANUAL US Model Canadian Model AEP Model UK Model Ver 1.1 2001. 10 E Model Australian Model Hong Kong Model Chinese Model Korea Model
MVC-FD83/FD88 SERVICE MANUAL US Model Canadian Model AEP Model UK Model Ver 1.1 2001. 10 E Model Australian Model Hong Kong Model Chinese Model Korea Model MVC-FD83/FD88 Tourist Model Photo: MVC-FD88 MVC-FD88 This service manual contains information for Japanese model as well. SPECIFICATIONS DIGITAL
CD PORTABLE SYSTEM RD-T70BU RD-T50LB
RD-T70BU/RD-T50LB(J) / LVT0931-001A / Cover RD-T50BU&T70GN(J)eng.book Page 1 Wednesday, April 17, 2002 4:30 PM CD PORTABLE SYSTEM RD-T70BU RD-T50LB SNOOZE /DIMMER SLEEP STANDBY/ON12345678910 +10 REPEAT TUNER CD BAND FM MODE BASS/TREBLE AHB PRO VOLUME REMOTE CONTROL RM-SRDT7A [RD-T70BU Only] INSTRUCT
PARTS LIST [ RD-T70BU ] - Contents -
PARTS LIST [ RD-T70BU ] * All printed circuit boards and its assemblies are not available as service parts. Area suffix UJ - U.S.Military - Contents - Exploded view of general assembly and parts list (Block No.M1) 3- 2 Electrical parts list (Block No.01~04) 3- 5 Packing materials and accessories par
SERVICE MANUAL COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-K350V
MX-K350V SERVICE MANUAL COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-K350V Area Suffix US ... SINGAPORE UX ... SAUDI Contents Safety precautions - 1- 2 Flow of functional Important for laser products - 1- 3 operation until TOC read - 1-20 Preventing static electricity - 1- 4 Maintenance of laser pickup - 1-21 Disass
RD-T70BU/RDR-TD5-0TL7B0BU SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS CD PORTABLE SYSTEM RD-T70BU
RD-T70BU/RDR-TD5-0TL7B0BU SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS CD PORTABLE SYSTEM RD-T70BU CD-ROM No.SML200212 Area suffix UJ - U.S.Military Contents Block diagram 2-1 Standard schematic diagrams 2-2 Printed circuit boards 2-12~15 No.21164SCH COPYRIGHT 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD. Dec. 2002 In regard with compo
COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-K350V Consists of CA-MXK350V and SP-MXK350V
MX-K350V[UX]_Eng.book Page 1 Monday, June 24, 2002 3:09 PM COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-K350V Consists of CA-MXK350V and SP-MXK350V 3-CD PLAY & EXCHANGE CD-R/RW PLAYBACK SOUND COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-K350V REPEAT MODE STANDBY/ON 1 BIT DUAL D/A CONVERTER PROGRAM SLEEPCELASSIC AUX RANDOM STANDBY ST
COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-K350V Consists of CA-MXK350V and SP-MXK350V CA-MXK350V SP-MXK350V
Cover.fm Page 1 Monday, July 22, 2002 2:31 PM COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-K350V Consists of CA-MXK350V and SP-MXK350V CA-MXK350V SP-MXK350V 3-CD PLAY & EXCHANGE CD-R/RW PLAYBACK SOUND COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-K350V REPEAT MODE STANDBY/ON 1 BIT DUAL D/A CONVERTER PROGRAM SLEEPCELASSIC AUX RANDOM S
PARTS LIST [ MX-K350V ] - Contents -
PARTS LIST [ MX-K350V ] * All printed circuit boards and its assemblies are not available as service parts. Area suffix US - Singapore UX - Saudi Arabia - Contents - Exploded view of general assembly and parts list (Block No.M1) 3- 3 CD changer mechanism assembly and parts list (Block No.MA) 3- 5 Ca
COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-K350V Consists of CA-MXK350V and SP-MXK350V CA-MXK350V SP-MXK350V
Cover.fm Page 1 Monday, July 22, 2002 2:31 PM COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-K350V Consists of CA-MXK350V and SP-MXK350V CA-MXK350V SP-MXK350V 3-CD PLAY & EXCHANGE CD-R/RW PLAYBACK SOUND COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-K350V REPEAT MODE STANDBY/ON 1 BIT DUAL D/A CONVERTER PROGRAM SLEEPCELASSIC AUX RANDOM S
MX-GT700 SERVICE MANUAL COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-GT700 Area suffix UW - Brazil,Mexico,Peru UJ - U.S.Military
MX-GT700 SERVICE MANUAL COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-GT700 Area suffix UW - Brazil,Mexico,Peru UJ - U.S.Military STANDBY DISC CHANGE STANDBY/ON 3 CD CD-R/RW P LAYBACK STANDBY/ ON123SUBW OOFER SLEEP LEVEL MX -GT700 SOUND456MODE AUX SOUNDM ODE789FM MODE 10 +10 CLOCK/TIMER KARAOKE ECHO DISPLAY FM/AM TAP
PARTS LIST [ MX-GT700 ] - Contents -
PARTS LIST [ MX-GT700 ] * All printed circuit boards and its assemblies are not available as service parts. Area suffix UW - Brazil,Mexico,Peru UJ - U.S.Military - Contents - Exploded view of general assembly and parts list (Block No.M1) 3- 3 CD changer mechanism assembly and parts list (Block No.MA
PARTS LIST [ RC-BX30 ] * All printed circuit boards and its assemblies are not available as service parts. Area suffix UJ - U.S.Military
PARTS LIST [ RC-BX30 ] * All printed circuit boards and its assemblies are not available as service parts. Area suffix UJ - U.S.Military - Contents - Exploded view of general assembly and parts list (Block No.M1) 3- 2 Electrical parts list (Block No.01~04) 3- 5 Packing materials and accessories part
SERVICE MANUAL CD PORTABLE SYSTEM RC-BX30
RC-BX30 SERVICE MANUAL CD PORTABLE SYSTEM RC-BX30 Area suffix UJ - U.S.Military Contents Safety precautions 1-2 Flow of functional operation Preventing static electricity 1-3 until TOC read 1-18 Important for laser products 1-4 Maintenance of laser pickup 1-19 Disassembly method 1-5 Replacement of l
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-K350V
MX-K350V SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-K350V CD-ROM No.SML200212 Area suffix US - Singapore UX - Saudi Arabia 3-CD PLAY & EXCHANGE CD-R/RW PLAYBACK SOUND COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-K350V REPEAT MODE STANDBY/ON 1 BIT DUAL D/A CONVERTER PROGRAM SLEEPCELASSIC AUX RANDOM STANDBY STANDB
COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM CA-MXGT700
COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM CA-MXGT700 CA-MXGT700 STANDBY DISC CHANGE STANDBY/ON 3 CD CD-R/RW PLAYBACK MX-GT700 SOUNDMODE CLOCK /TIMER DISPLAY STANDBY/ON EXTENDED SUPER BASS123SUBWOOFER SLEEP LEVEL456AUX SOUNDMODE FMAUX CD TAPE /AM MIC789LEVEL FM MODE 10 +10 MIN MAX REPEAT PROGRAM RANDOM TAPE A TAPE BP
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-GT700
MX-GT700 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM MX-GT700 Area suffix CD-ROM No.SML200212 UW - Brazil,Mexico,Peru UJ - U.S.Military STANDBY DISC CHANGE STANDBY/ON 3 CD CD-R/RW P LAYBACK STANDBY/ ON123SUBW OOFER SLEEP LEVEL MX -GT700 SOUND456MODE AUX SOUNDM ODE789FM MODE 10 +10 CLOCK/TIMER KARAOK
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS CD PORTABLE SYSTEM RC-BX30
RC-BX30 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS CD PORTABLE SYSTEM RC-BX30 CD-ROM No.SML200212 Area suffix UJ - U.S.Military Contents Block diagram 2-1 Standard schematic diagrams 2-2 Printed circuit boards 2-8 11 No.21171SCH COPYRIGHT 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD. Dec. 2002 In regard with component parts appearing
SERVICE MANUAL UX-P70
UX-P70 SERVICE MANUAL MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM UX-P70 Area suffix UP - Korea This model is UX-P70_UP that is added to the preceding model,theUX-P7_US. Therefore, this service manual is consisting of diffrence parts list with UX-P7_A.US,UF,UP,UW,UY. Please refer to the service manual of UX-P7_A.US,UF,U
PARTS LIST [ TH-A30 ] - Contents -
PARTS LIST [ TH-A30 ] * All printed circuit boards and its assemblies are not available as service parts. Area suffix US - Singapore UB - Hong Kong UW - Brazil,Mexico,Peru UG - Turkey,South Africa,Egypt A - Australia - Contents - Exploded view of general assembly and parts list (Block No.M1) 3- 2 DV
DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30 Consists of XV-THA30, SP-XA30, SP-XSA30 and SP-WA30
DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30 Consists of XV-THA30, SP-XA30, SP-XSA30 and SP-WA30 STANDBY/ON AUDIO TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME VCR DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNEL TUNING B.SEARCH F.SEARCH ENTER VOLUME TOP MENU
SERVICE MANUAL MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM UX-M33
UX-M33 SERVICE MANUAL MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM UX-M33 Area suffix E - Continental Europe EN - Northern EuropeMICROCOMPONENTSYSTEMUX- M33STANDBY OPEN /ON /CLOSE DISPLAY REMAIN MODE /RDS MODE STANDBY/ON TIMER ON/OFF INTRO/RDS SEARCH SET TUNER CD/RANDOM /BAND TAPE RANDOM BAND CD TUNER TAPE REC PROGRAM PR
SERVICE MANUAL UX-P50
UX-P50 SERVICE MANUAL MICRO COMPONENET SYSTEM UX-P50 Area suffix UP - Korea This model is UX-P50_UP that is added to the preceding model,theUX-P5_US. Therefore ,this service manual is consisting of diffrence parts list with UX-P5_A.UP,US,UY,UW,UJ. Please refer to the service manual of UX-P5_A.UP,US,
PARTS LIST [ UX-M33 ] - Contents -
PARTS LIST [ UX-M33 ] * All printed circuit boards and its assemblies are not available as service parts. Area suffix E - Continental Europe EN - Northern Europe - Contents - Exploded view of general assembly and parts list (Block No.M1) 3- 3 Electrical parts list (Block No.01~04) 3- 5 Packing mater
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM UX-M33
UX-M33 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM UX-M33 CD-ROM No.SML200212 Area suffix E - Continental Europe EN - Northern EuropeMICROCOMPONENTSYSTEMUX- M33STANDBY OPEN /ON /CLOSE DISPLAY REMAIN MODE /RDS MODE STANDBY/ON TIMER ON/OFF INTRO/RDS SEARCH SET TUNER CD/RANDOM /BAND TAPE RANDOM BAND CD T
SERVICE MANUAL MICRO COMPONENT MD SYSTEM UX-Z7MD TABLE OF CONTENTS No.22003
SERVICE MANUAL MICRO COMPONENT MD SYSTEM UX-Z7MD TABLE OF CONTENTS Important Safety Precautions .2 Disassembly Method .5 Mechanism .19 Adjustment method .37 Description of major ICs .45 No.22003 COPYRIGHT © 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD. 2002/12 SECTION 1 Important Safety Precautions 1.1 Safety
PARTS LIST [ UX-Z7MD ] - Contents -
PARTS LIST [ UX-Z7MD ] * All printed circuit boards and its assemblies are not available as service parts. Area suffix UF - China UP - Korea - Contents - Exploded view of general assembly and parts list (Block No.M1) 3- 3 Speaker assembly and parts list (Block No.M2) 3- 6 CD mechanism assembly and p
DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30 Consists of XV-THA30, SP-XA30, SP-XSA30 and SP-WA30
DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30 Consists of XV-THA30, SP-XA30, SP-XSA30 and SP-WA30 STANDBY/ON AUDIO TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME VCR DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNEL TUNING B.SEARCH F.SEARCH ENTER VOLUME TOP MENU
SERVICE MANUAL
TH-V70 SERVICE MANUAL DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-V70 Area Suffix UT - Taiwan This model is TH-V70_UT that is added to the preceding model,theTH-V70_US. Therefore ,this service manual is consisting of diffrence parts list with TH-V70_A.US.UB.UX. Please refer to the service manual of TH-V70_A.US.UB.
UX-Z7MD SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS MICRO COMPONENET MD SYSTEM UX-Z7MD
UX-Z7MD SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS MICRO COMPONENET MD SYSTEM UX-Z7MD CD-ROM No.SML200212 Area Suffix UP - Korea UF -China Contents Block diagram - 2-1 Standard schematic diagrams - 2-2 Printed circuit boards - 2-9~12 No.22003SCH COPYRIGHT 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD. Dec. 2002 In regard with componen
SERVICE MANUAL CD RECEIVER KD-S735R
SERVICE MANUAL CD RECEIVER KD-S735R Area Suffix E Continental Europe EX Central Europe 45Wx4 DISP MO RND78910 11 12 RDS TP PTY SCM COMPACT DIGITAL AUDIO TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Important Safety Precautions ..1-2 2 Disassembly method ..1-4 3 Adjustment method ..1-11 4 Description of major ICs ..1-15 No.4